manualshive.com logo in svg

Ricoh D023, Service Manual, Page: 396 / 1522

Share
Download
Ricoh D023 Service Manual Download Page 396

D023/D025 ii 

SM 

Appendix 

1.6.10

 

SHIFT TRAY (D388) ................................................................. 1-37

 

1.6.11

 

1-BIN TRAY UNIT (D414) ......................................................... 1-37

 

2.

 

APPENDIX: MAINTENANCE TABLES ....................................... 2-1

 

2.1

 

MAINTENANCE TABLES .......................................................................... 2-1

 

2.1.1

 

PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE ITEMS ............................................ 2-1

 

Mainframe ............................................................................................ 2-1

 

ARDF (D366)........................................................................................ 2-5

 

One-tray Paper Feed Unit (D387) ........................................................ 2-5

 

Two-tray Paper Feed Unit (D351) ........................................................ 2-6

 

1200-sheet LCT (D353)........................................................................ 2-7

 

2000-sheet LCT (D352)........................................................................ 2-7

 

1000-Sheet Booklet Finisher (B793) .................................................... 2-8

 

1000-Sheet Booklet Finisher Punch Kit (B807) .................................... 2-8

 

1000-Sheet Finisher (B408) ................................................................. 2-8

 

1 Bin Tray (D414) ................................................................................. 2-9

 

Bridge Unit (D386)................................................................................ 2-9

 

Shift Tray (D388) .................................................................................. 2-9

 

2.1.2

 

OTHERS YIELD PARTS................................................................. 2-10

 

Mainframe .......................................................................................... 2-10

 

ARDF ................................................................................................. 2-10

 

3.

 

APPENDIX: SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS ............................... 3-1

 

3.1

 

SC TABLES ............................................................................................... 3-1

 

3.1.1

 

SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS......................................................... 3-1

 

Summary.............................................................................................. 3-1

 

SC Code Classification......................................................................... 3-2

 

3.1.2

 

SC1XX: SCANNING ......................................................................... 3-5

 

3.1.3

 

SC 2XX: EXPOSURE ..................................................................... 3-10

 

3.1.4

 

SC3XX: IMAGE PROCESSING – 1................................................ 3-16

 

3.1.5

 

SC4XX: IMAGE PROCESSING - 2................................................. 3-21

 

3.1.6

 

SC5XX: PAPER FEED AND FUSING ............................................ 3-26

 

3.1.7

 

SC6XX: DEVICE COMMUNICATION............................................. 3-45

 

3.1.8

 

SC7XX: PERIPHERALS ................................................................. 3-55

 

3.1.9

 

SC8XX: OVERALL SYSTEM .......................................................... 3-71

 

3.1.10

 

SC9XX: MISCELLANEOUS ...................................................... 3-85

 

Summary of Contents for D023

Page 1: ...D023 D025 SERVICE MANUAL Book 1 of 2 003987MIU MAINFRAME...

Page 2: ......

Page 3: ...D023 D025 SERVICE MANUAL B00K 1 of 2 MAINFRAME...

Page 4: ......

Page 5: ...D023 D025 SERVICE MANUAL BOOK 1 of 2 MAINFRAME 003987MIU...

Page 6: ......

Page 7: ...ION OF RICOH AMERICAS CORPORATION All product names domain names or product illustrations including desktop images used in this document are trademarks registered trademarks or the property of their r...

Page 8: ......

Page 9: ...tion Users of this manual should be either service trained or certified by successfully completing a Ricoh Technical Training Program Untrained and uncertified users utilizing information contained in...

Page 10: ......

Page 11: ...COMPANY PRODUCT CODE GESTETNER LANIER RICOH SAVIN D023 MP C2800 LD528C Aficio MP C2800 C2828 D025 MP C3300 LD533C Aficio MP C3300 C3333 DOCUMENTATION HISTORY REV NO DATE COMMENTS 10 2008 Original Pri...

Page 12: ......

Page 13: ...PRODUCTS 1 11 INSTALLATION 2 INSTALLATION 2 1 2 1 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS 2 1 2 1 1 ENVIRONMENT 2 1 2 1 2 MACHINE LEVEL 2 1 2 1 3 MACHINE SPACE REQUIREMENTS 2 2 2 1 4 POWER REQUIREMENTS 2 2 2 2 OPTI...

Page 14: ...PER FEED UNIT INSTALLATION D351 2 23 2 6 1 ACCESSORY CHECK 2 23 2 6 2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 2 24 2 7 2000 SHEET LCT 2 26 2 7 1 ACCESSORY CHECK 2 26 2 7 2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 2 26 2 8 1200 SHEET LC...

Page 15: ...2 59 2 17 PUNCH UNIT 2 63 2 17 1 COMPONENT CHECK 2 63 2 17 2 INSTALLATION 2 65 2 18 MECHANICAL COUNTER NA ONLY 2 70 2 18 1 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 2 70 2 19 KEY COUNTER BRACKET 2 72 2 19 1 INSTALLATIO...

Page 16: ...llation Procedure 2 100 2 26 6 IEEE 802 11 A G G WIRELESS LAN 2 101 Installation Procedure 2 101 UP Mode Settings for Wireless LAN 2 102 SP Mode and UP Mode Settings for IEEE 802 11 a g g Wireless LAN...

Page 17: ...THE NEW PM PARTS 3 3 3 2 3 PREPARATION BEFORE OPERATION CHECK 3 4 3 2 4 OPERATION CHECK 3 4 REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT 4 REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT 4 1 4 1 BEFOREHAND 4 1 4 2 SPECIAL TOOLS 4 2 4 3 IMA...

Page 18: ...1 4 4 9 OZONE FILTER 4 22 Ozone filters for the scanner unit 4 22 4 5 SCANNER UNIT 4 23 4 5 1 EXPOSURE GLASS 4 23 4 5 2 ORIGINAL LENGTH WIDTH SENSORS 4 24 4 5 3 EXPOSURE LAMP 4 25 Reassembling 4 26 4...

Page 19: ...4 7 3 TONER COLLECTION BOTTLE 4 52 4 7 4 SECOND DUCT FAN 4 53 When reinstalling the second duct fan 4 54 4 7 5 THIRD DUCT FAN 4 55 When reinstalling the third duct fan 4 55 4 7 6 TONER PUMP UNIT 4 56...

Page 20: ...4 91 4 10 13 TONER COLLECTION UNIT 4 92 4 10 14 PAPER FEED CLUTCHES 4 93 4 10 15 DEVELOPMENT CLUTCH Y 4 95 4 10 16 DEVELOPMENT CLUTCHES FOR M AND C 4 97 4 10 17 DEVELOPMENT CLUTCH K 4 98 4 11 FUSING...

Page 21: ...ASS BOTTOM TRAY 4 123 4 12 8 BY PASS PAPER END SENSOR 4 126 4 12 9 BY PASS PICK UP FEED AND SEPARATION ROLLER TORQUE LIMITER 4 127 4 12 10 BY PASS FEED CLUTCH 4 128 4 12 11 PAPER EXIT UNIT 4 129 4 12...

Page 22: ...nstallation 4 151 4 14 14 NVRAM REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE 4 152 NVRAM on the BICU 4 152 NVRAM on the Controller 4 152 4 15 USING DIP SWITCHES 4 154 4 15 1 CONTROLLER BOARD 4 154 4 15 2 BICU BOARD 4 154 SY...

Page 23: ...5 14 Uploading Content of NVRAM to an SD card 5 14 Downloading an SD Card to NVRAM 5 14 5 2 7 ADDRESS BOOK UPLOAD DOWNLOAD 5 16 Information List 5 16 Download 5 16 Upload 5 17 5 2 8 INSTALLING ANOTHER...

Page 24: ...DING ERRORS MANUALLY 5 43 5 10 5 NEW DEBUG LOG CODES 5 43 SP5857 015 Copy SD Card to SD Card Any Desired Key 5 43 SP5857 016 Create a File on HDD to Store a Log 5 44 SP5857 017 Create a File on SD Car...

Page 25: ...SECTION B793 FOR DETAILED TABLE OF CONTENTS PAPER FEED UNIT PB3040 D351 SEE SECTION D351 FOR DETAILED TABLE OF CONTENTS LCIT PB3050 D352 SEE SECTION D352 FOR DETAILED TABLE OF CONTENTS 1200 SHEET LCIT...

Page 26: ...RNAL SHIFT TRAY SH3040 D388 SEE SECTION D388 FOR DETAILED TABLE OF CONTENTS FAX OPTION TYPE C5000 D393 SEE SECTION D393 FOR DETAILED TABLE OF CONTENTS 1 BIN TRAY BN3070 D414 SEE SECTION B408 FOR DETAI...

Page 27: ...ONDITIONS REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT APPENDIX PROCESS CONTROL ERROR CONDITIONS SYSTEM MAINTENANCE REFERENCE APPENDIX TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE TROUBLESHOOTING APPENDIX JAM DETECTION APPENDIX ELECTRICAL CO...

Page 28: ......

Page 29: ...hose components with your bare hands Health Safety Conditions 1 Toner and developer are non toxic but if you get either of them in your eyes by accident it may cause temporary eye discomfort Immediate...

Page 30: ...ccordance with local regulations 4 When keeping used lithium batteries in order to dispose of them later do not put more than 100 batteries per sealed box Storing larger numbers or not sealing them ap...

Page 31: ...ction Laser beams can seriously damage your eyes CAUTION MARKING Symbols Abbreviations and Trademarks This manual uses several symbols and abbreviations The meaning of those symbols and abbreviations...

Page 32: ...s Incorporated PCL is a registered trademark of Hewlett Packard Company Ethernet is a registered trademark of Xerox Corporation PowerPC is a registered trademark of International Business Machines Cor...

Page 33: ...PRODUCT INFORMATION SECTION 1 PRODUCT INFORMATION REVISION HISTORY Page Date Added Updated New None...

Page 34: ......

Page 35: ...duct Information 1 PRODUCT INFORMATION 1 1 SPECIFICATIONS See Appendices for the following information Mainframe Specifications Printer Specifications Scanner Specifications Supported Paper Sizes Soft...

Page 36: ...D023 D025 1 2 SM 1 2 OVERVIEW 1 2 1 COMPONENT LAYOUT...

Page 37: ...8 Original Length Sensor 9 Scanner Motor 10 Lens Block 11 Sensor Board Unit SBU 12 Decurler Rollers 13 Duplex Unit 14 Fusing Unit 15 Paper Transfer Roller 16 Registration Roller 17 By Pass Feed Table...

Page 38: ...Feed 8 Tray 3 Optional Paper Feed Unit LCT 9 Tray 4 Optional Paper Feed Unit 10 Finisher Stapler Optional 11 Finisher Punch Optional 12 Finisher Lower Tray Optional 13 Finisher Proof Tray Optional 14...

Page 39: ...nd CMY 3 ITB Image Transfer Belt Contact Motor Moves The ITB Into Contact And Away From The Color Pcus 4 Toner Transport Motor Drives The Toner Attraction Pumps And The Toner Collection Coils From The...

Page 40: ...Up Feed And Separation Rollers 10 Registration Motor Drives The Registration Roller 11 By Pass Duplex Feed Motor Drives The By Pass Pick Up Feed And Separation Roller And Duplex Transport Rollers 12 P...

Page 41: ...ode Call out Remarks Mainframe D023 D025 1 Platen Cover G329 2 Ardf D366 3 One from the two 500 Sheet Finisher D372 14 Requires 12 1000 Sheet Booklet Finisher B793 11 One from 10 11 and 14 Requires 12...

Page 42: ...0 One from 10 11 and 14 Requires 13 one from 6 and 7 2000 Sheet LCT D352 6 Two Tray Paper Feed Unit D351 7 One Tray Paper Feed Unit D387 8 One from the three The one tray PFU requires 9 Caster Table D...

Page 43: ...IEEE 1284 B679 17 D Wireless LAN IEEE 802 11a g D377 01 NA D377 02 EU AA Wireless LAN IEEE 802 11g D377 19 E Bluetooth B826 17 F You can only install one of these at a time File Format Converter D377...

Page 44: ...23 D025 1 10 SM DataOverwriteSecurity Unit D377 06 PictBridge D413 04 VM Card D430 01 NA D430 02 EU D430 03 AA Browser Unit D403 05 NA D403 06 EU D403 07 AA HDD Encryption Unit D377 16 In SD card slot...

Page 45: ...s PM Operation for PCU New steps were added to the replacement procedure for the drum unit Turn the development roller counterclockwise Do SP 1902 001 PCU Drive Mechanism Drum development drive motor...

Page 46: ......

Page 47: ...INSTALLATION SECTION 2 INSTALLATION Page Date Added Updated New 116 118 6 14 2011 Browser Unit 116 10 13 2011 Important note Browser Unit...

Page 48: ......

Page 49: ...more 5 Do not let the machine get exposed to the following 1 Cool air from an air conditioner 2 Heat from a heater 6 Do not install the machine in areas that are exposed to corrosive gas 7 Install the...

Page 50: ...m A Over 100 mm 3 9 B Over 100 mm 3 9 C Over 550 mm 21 7 D Over 750 mm 29 5 Put the machine near the power source with the clearance shown above 2 1 4 POWER REQUIREMENTS Insert the plug firmly in the...

Page 51: ...ONS 2 2 1 MACHINE OPTIONS No Options Remarks 1 Platen Cover 2 ARDF One from No 1 or No 2 3 1 Bin Tray Unit 4 1200 Sheet LCT Requires No 5 and No 6 5 Large Capacity Tray 6 Two Tray Paper Feed Unit 7 On...

Page 52: ...ions require a parent option 2 2 2 CONTROLLER OPTIONS No Options Remarks 1 Bluetooth 2 IEEE 802 11a b g 3 IEEE 1284 One from the three I F Slot A 4 File Format Converter I F Slot B 5 Gigabit Ethernet...

Page 53: ...tions Remarks 1 Fax Option Type C5000 2 Hand Set Type 1018 Requires No 1 NA Only 3 G3 Interface Unit Type C5000 Child options Child options require a parent option 2 2 4 OTHER OPTIONS No Options Remar...

Page 54: ...fer belt is in its correct position away from the PCUs before you move the machine Otherwise the image transfer belt and the black PCU can be damaged 2 3 1 POWER SOCKETS FOR PERIPHERALS Rating voltage...

Page 55: ...LATION FLOW CHART This flow chart shows the best procedure for installation You need the optional paper tray unit or the LCT if you want to install the finisher B408 B804 or B805 The punch unit is for...

Page 56: ...hine and other options Keep the shipping retainers after you install the machine You may need them in the future if you transport the machine to another location Tapes and Retainers 1 Remove all the t...

Page 57: ...unit lock lever C and turn the drum positioning plate lever D counterclockwise 4 Open the drum positioning plate E 5 Remove all tapes F from the four development units When you remove the tape from th...

Page 58: ...Paper Trays 1 Pull each paper tray out Then adjust the side guides and end guide to match the paper size To move the side guide first pull out the tray fully Then push down the green lock at the rear...

Page 59: ...change the emblem that has been already attached remove the panel with an object not a sharp object as shown D and then install the correct emblem 2 Attach the correct paper tray number and size decal...

Page 60: ...nance ACC Start 2 Put the printout on the exposure glass 3 Put 10 sheets of white paper on top of the test chart 4 Close the ARDF or the platen cover 5 Press Start Scanning on the LCD panel The machin...

Page 61: ...1 The setting of SP5816 201 in the mainframe must be 0 2 Device ID2 SP5811 003 must be correctly programmed 6 spaces must be put between the 3 digit prefix and the following 8 digit number e g xxx____...

Page 62: ...208 Error Codes below this 9 Request number confirmation executing Processing Please wait 5 Make sure that the screen displays the Location Information with SP5816 205 only when it has been input at t...

Page 63: ...or Registration 12003 Attempted registration without execution of a confirmation and no previous registration Perform Confirmation before attempting the Registration 12004 Attempted setting with illeg...

Page 64: ...base out of service 2390 Program out of service 2391 Two registrations for the same mainframe Check the registration condition of the mainframe 2392 Parameter error 2393 External RCG not managed 2394...

Page 65: ...ause the tube to be clogged with toner 3 Make sure there is no paper left in the paper trays Then fix down the bottom plates with a sheet of paper and tape 4 Empty the toner collection bottle Then att...

Page 66: ...E TRAY PAPER FEED UNIT D387 2 4 1 ACCESSORY CHECK Check the quantity and condition of the accessories against the following list No Description Q ty 1 Securing Bracket 2 2 Screw M4x10 2 3 Spring Washe...

Page 67: ...the copier The copier is highly unstable when lifted by one person and may cause human injury or property damage Do not lift the copier with the paper feed unit installed The handle and grips may be d...

Page 68: ...screw D 7 Reinstall all trays 8 Attach the securing brackets E M4x10 x 1 each One of the securing brackets is used as a securing tool the cutout F is used in step 6 But the cutout G is for attaching...

Page 69: ...Table D446 SM 2 21 D023 D025 Installation 2 5 CASTER TABLE D446 2 5 1 COMPONENT CHECK No Description Q ty 1 Caster Table 1 2 Stud Screw 1 2 5 2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1 Put the caster table on a flat...

Page 70: ...t on the caster table D Hold the handle and grips of the machine when you lift and move the machine 4 Pull out tray 2 of the mainframe or the tray of the one tray paper feed unit 5 Secure the machine...

Page 71: ...5 Installation 2 6 PAPER FEED UNIT INSTALLATION D351 2 6 1 ACCESSORY CHECK Check the quantity and condition of the accessories against the following list No Description Q ty 1 Securing Bracket 2 2 Scr...

Page 72: ...r more persons to lift the copier The copier is highly unstable when lifted by one person and may cause injury or property damage Do not lift the copier with the paper feed unit installed The handle a...

Page 73: ...screw D 7 Reinstall all trays 8 Attach the securing brackets E x 1 each M4x10 One of the securing brackets is used as a securing tool the cutout F is used in step 6 But the cutout G is for attaching...

Page 74: ...asher Screw 1 4 Knob Screw 3 2 7 2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Turn off the main switch of the copier and unplug the power cord before you start the installation procedure You need two or more persons to l...

Page 75: ...Installation 1 Remove all tapes and retainers in the LCT 2 Grasp the handle A and grips B of the machine 3 Lift the copier and install it on the LCT C Hold the handle A and grips B of the machine whe...

Page 76: ...One of the securing brackets is used as a securing tool the cutout F is used in step 5 But the cutout G is for attaching the tray heater Therefore attach the securing brackets E after installing the...

Page 77: ...D025 Installation 2 8 1200 SHEET LCT D353 2 8 1 COMPONENT CHECK Check the quantity and condition of the components against the following list No Description Q ty 1 Front Bracket 1 2 Rear Bracket 1 3 S...

Page 78: ...Paper Tray Unit D351 or LCT 2000 sheet D352 must be installed before installing this 1200 sheet LCT 1 Unpack the LCT and remove the tapes 2 Remove the stand covers A 3 Release the locks B of the fron...

Page 79: ...he front B and rear brackets C 8 Pull out the front and rear rails A and then hang them on each bracket B 9 Connect the LCT cable C to the main machine 10 Slide the LCT D into the main machine 11 Make...

Page 80: ...emove the front and rear side fences A B x 1 each 4 Install the side fences in the correct position A4 LEF LT LEF B5 LEF 5 Pull the end fence A for B5 size paper as shown x 1 if the side fences are ad...

Page 81: ...9 AUTO REVERSE DOCUMENT FEEDER D366 2 9 1 COMPONENT CHECK Check the quantity and condition of the components against the following list No Description Q ty 1 ARDF 1 2 Stamp Cartridge 1 3 Screwdriver...

Page 82: ...hipping retainers 2 Remove the two screws already installed at the top rear of the machine 3 Insert the two stud screws A on the top of the machine 4 Mount the ARDF B by aligning the screw keyholes C...

Page 83: ...Document Feeder D366 SM 2 35 D023 D025 Installation 7 Remove two screws E from the bottom of the ARDF 8 Install the stamp cartridge F in the ARDF 9 Peel off the platen sheet G and place it on the exp...

Page 84: ...ch the decal I to the top cover as shown Choose the language you want 14 Plug in and turn on the main power switch of the machine and then check the ARDF operation 15 Make a full size copy Check that...

Page 85: ...against the following list No Description Q ty 1 Handle Unit 1 2 Holder 1 3 Stud Bracket 1 4 Securing Bracket 1 5 Handle Bracket 1 6 Hinge Stopper Right 1 7 Hinge Stopper Left 1 8 Spacer 1 9 Bushing...

Page 86: ...2 38 SM 2 10 2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Turn off the main switch of the copier and unplug the power cord before you start the installation procedure Preparing before Installing the DF Handle 1 Open the...

Page 87: ...ation B inside the ADF cover 3 Secure the stud bracket C to the outside of the ADF cover at location D with two screws x 2 M3x8 The two screws must go through the ADF cover and the securing bracket A...

Page 88: ...he rear side away from the operation panel temporarily and then at the front side temporarily After that secure them fully 2 Install the bushing 6MM B in the inside of the handle unit 3 Attach the han...

Page 89: ...handle unit with a screw x 1 M3x8 6 Clean the handle unit with alcohol Then attach the stud decal E at the location that was cleaned 7 Attach the handle bracket F at the front right side on the bottom...

Page 90: ...s left G and right H to the left and right hinges Tapping screw x 2 M4x8 each 10 Clean the front side of the duplex unit with alcohol Then attach the operation decal I at the location that was cleaned...

Page 91: ...Tray Unit 1 2 End Fence 1 3 Tray Support Bar 1 4 Screws M3 X 16 2 5 Tray 1 2 11 2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Unplug the copier power cord before starting the following procedure If the bridge unit D386 ha...

Page 92: ...ight cover A x 1 4 Remove the inner cover B x 1 Keep this screw for step 5 5 Install the 1 bin tray unit C x 1 x 1 x 1 This screw was removed in step 4 6 Attach the tray support bar D to the tray E as...

Page 93: ...Install the tray G with the tray support bar in the machine M3 x 16 x 2 8 Reinstall the front right cover in the machine and then close the right door of the machine 9 Turn on the main power switch o...

Page 94: ...ECK Check the quantity and condition of the components against the following list No Description Q ty 1 Shift Tray Unit 1 2 Paper Guide Small 2 3 Connector Cover 1 2 12 2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Unplug...

Page 95: ...3 Remove the inner cover B x 1 4 Install the small paper guides C 5 Attach the connector cover D to the shift tray unit E 6 Install the shift tray unit E to the machine 7 Push down the left edge F of...

Page 96: ...E UNIT D386 2 13 1 COMPONENT CHECK Check the quantity and condition of the components against the following list No Description Q ty 1 Bridge Unit 1 2 Frame Cover 1 3 Knob Screw 1 4 Long Knob Screw 1...

Page 97: ...re you install the bridge unit D386 This will make it easier for you to do the following procedure 2 If you will install a finisher B408 or B793 in the machine install the finisher after you install t...

Page 98: ...front right cover Otherwise the bridge unit cover is an obstacle for attaching the front right cover 11 Install the optional finisher refer to the finisher installation procedure If you will not inst...

Page 99: ...it D386 SM 2 51 D023 D025 Installation 13 Check the bridge unit operation 14 Pull the extension tray K only if the 1000 sheet finisher B408 or the 500 sheet finisher D372 is to be installed in the mai...

Page 100: ...CK Check the quantity and condition of the accessories against the following list No Description Q ty 1 Unit Holder 1 2 Shift Tray 1 3 Holder Bracket 1 4 Screw M3 x 8 4 5 Screw M3 x 6 1 6 Screw M4 x 1...

Page 101: ...before starting the following procedure Before you install the 500 sheet finisher the optional bridge unit D386 must be installed 1 Unpack the finisher and remove the tapes 2 Install the unit holder...

Page 102: ...SM 5 Install the 500 sheet finisher A 6 Install the holder bracket B x 1 M3 x 6 7 Connect the finisher cable C 8 Install the shift tray A x 2 M3 x 8 9 Turn on the main power switch and check the fini...

Page 103: ...ition of the accessories against the following list No Description Q ty D023 D025 1 Front Joint Bracket 1 O 2 Rear Joint Bracket 1 3 Rear Joint Bracket 1 O 4 Grounding Plate 1 O 5 Copy Tray 1 O 6 Stap...

Page 104: ...tions must be installed before installing this finisher Bridge Unit D386 Paper Feed Unit D351 or LCT D352 1 Unpack the finisher and then remove the stopper A and tapes x 1 2 Install the front joint br...

Page 105: ...ing lever G 1 knob screw M3 x 8 5 Align the finisher on the joint brackets and lock it in place by pushing the locking lever 6 Secure the locking lever 1 knob screw M3 x 8 7 Close the front door 8 Ins...

Page 106: ...quantity and condition of the accessories against the following list No Description Q ty 1 Rear Joint Bracket 1 2 Front Joint Bracket 1 3 Grounding Plate 1 4 Upper Output Tray 1 5 Cushion 2 6 Lower Ou...

Page 107: ...ROCEDURE Unplug the main machine power cord before starting the following procedure The bridge unit D386 and optional paper feed unit D387 or D351 must be installed before installing this finisher B79...

Page 108: ...ll out the jogger unit B 3 Remove all tapes and packing materials from the inside of the finisher 4 Attach the cushions C to the finisher Make sure that the cushions are placed within 0 to 1 mm D from...

Page 109: ...utside the front joint bracket G The holder bracket is provided with the bridge unit D386 8 Pull the lock lever I Long knob screw x 1 9 Slowly push the finisher to the left side of the machine keeping...

Page 110: ...D025 2 62 SM 13 Install the upper output tray M Short knob screw x 1 14 Install the lower output tray N 15 Turn on the main power switch of the machine 16 Check the 1000 sheet booklet finisher operat...

Page 111: ...ntity and condition of the components against the following list No Description Q ty 1 Punch Unit 1 2 Punch Drive Motor 1 3 Hopper Full Sensor Arm 1 4 Sub scan Registration Sensor Unit 1 5 Punch Unit...

Page 112: ...D023 D025 2 64 SM...

Page 113: ...eet booklet finisher has been installed disconnect it and pull it away from the machine 1 If the finisher is connected to the machine disconnect it 2 Open the top cover A and then release the guide ar...

Page 114: ...2 66 SM 7 Cover bracket H x 1 8 Remove the paper guide plate I from the rear side x 4 9 Install the punch unit stay J from the front side x 3 10 Install the sub scan registration sensor guide K from t...

Page 115: ...rom the punch unit x 1 12 Install the punch unit M along the punch unit stay from the rear side 13 Make sure to put the punch unit stay pin N through the hole O 14 Connect the harnesses P to the main...

Page 116: ...ct the drive motor harness T to the harness from the punch unit x 1 18 Connect the home position sensor harness from the punch unit to the home position sensor U 19 Install the sub scan registration s...

Page 117: ...sensor unit to the hopper full sensor X 23 Install the hopper Y from the front side 24 Reinstall the timing belt cover and knob 25 Reinstall the rear cover x 2 26 Close the front door and top cover 27...

Page 118: ...Rear Cover in the Replacement and Adjustment section 2 Right rear cover see Right Rear Cover in the Replacement and Adjustment section 3 Remove the cutouts A in the right rear cover with nippers 4 Att...

Page 119: ...ion 5 Attach the mechanical counter bracket to the frame D x 1 x 2 x 1 6 Reassemble the machine 7 Plug in the machine and turn on the main power switch 8 Enter the SP mode 9 Set SP5987 001 to 1 ON 10...

Page 120: ...plate nuts A on the inside of the key counter bracket B and insert the key counter holder C 2 Secure the key counter holder to the bracket x 2 3 Install the key counter cover D x 2 4 Rear cover Rear C...

Page 121: ...73 D023 D025 Installation 6 Connect the harness to the connector F inside the machine 7 Peel off double sided tape on the key counter bracket and attach the key counter to the scanner right cover G 8...

Page 122: ...et see Controller Box in the Replacement and Adjustment section 3 Install the four stud stays in the location A in the controller box 4 Install the key counter interface board on the four stud stays i...

Page 123: ...the clamp D and put it as shown by the blue arrow x 1 9 Route the harness from the counter device in the same way as the other harnesses E x 3 10 Connect the harness from the counter device to CN4 on...

Page 124: ...1 COPY DATA SECURITY UNIT TYPE F B829 2 21 1 INSTALLATION Unplug the main machine power cord before you do the following procedure 1 Remove the rear cover A of the machine x 8 2 Remove the controller...

Page 125: ...ation The machine will issue an SC165 error if the machine is powered on with the ICIB 3 removed and the Data Security for Copying feature set to ON When you remove this option from the machine first...

Page 126: ...A 2 22 1 ACCESSORY CHECK Check the quantity and condition of the accessories against the following list No Description Q ty 1 USB2 0 SD Slot 1 2 Ground Plate 1 3 USB Cable 1 4 Screw M3 x 6 blue 1 5 S...

Page 127: ...n the USB2 0 SD Slot as shown above 2 Attach the ground plate C to the bracket of the USB2 0 SD Slot x 1 M3x6 blue 3 Rear cover of the machine x 8 4 Remove the scanner left cover A x 2 5 Remove the le...

Page 128: ...nner left cover with a screwdriver as shown A Smooth the four holes in the scanner left cover as shown B 10 Route the USB cable A through the gaps in the left scanner cover 11 Secure the USB2 0 SD Slo...

Page 129: ...cutout B of the left frame cover 14 Attach the scanner left cover C to the mainframe and then connect the USB cable A to USB A front side as shown above Make sure that the USB cable is inserted in USB...

Page 130: ...lectricity conducted through an inserted SD card could cause the machine to malfunction 3 Make sure that no previous settings remain If a previous setting remains press the Clear Modes key 4 Place an...

Page 131: ...Open the ARDF or platen cover 3 Glass cover A x 4 4 ARDF exposure glass B 5 Rear scale C x 3 6 Exposure glass with left scale D 7 Move the scanner carriage to the right side by rotating the scanner mo...

Page 132: ...STALLATION PROCEDURE 1 Remove trays 1 and 2 from the machine 2 Remove the connector cover A x 1 3 Connect the connector B of the heater to the connector of the main machine 4 Install the heater C insi...

Page 133: ...23 D025 Installation 2 25 ANTI CONDENSATION HEATER TYPE A 2 25 1 COMPONENT CHECK No Description Q ty 1 Tray Heater 1 2 On Standby Decal 1 90 or 2 91 3 Harness 2 For D387 1 4 Harness 1 For D351 D352 1...

Page 134: ...edure Do the following procedure not to damage any harnesses Check that all harnesses are not damaged nor pinched after installation For installing the tray heater in D351 1 Rear cover A x 8 2 Pull ou...

Page 135: ...emove the two securing brackets C x 1 each and then the rear cover D of the optional paper feed unit x 2 5 Remove the harness cover bracket E x 1 6 Pull out tray 2 from the mainframe 7 Replace the sho...

Page 136: ...of the mainframe 11 Reassemble the mainframe and optional paper feed unit 12 Attach the on standby decal L to the right hand side of the main power switch Installing the Tray Heater in D352 1 Remove t...

Page 137: ...Left tray A x 2 4 Remove the right tray B while pressing down the stopper C When reinstalling the right tray set the right tray on the guide rail and carefully push the tray in making sure to keep th...

Page 138: ...ing brackets E x 1 each and the then rear cover F of the optional LCT x 2 7 Remove the harness cover bracket G x 1 8 Pull out tray 2 from the mainframe 9 Replace the shoulder screw H with the washer s...

Page 139: ...of the mainframe 13 Reassemble the mainframe and optional LCT 14 Reassemble the mainframe and optional paper feed unit 15 Attach the on standby decal N to the right hand side of the main power switch...

Page 140: ...paper tray x 2 5 Remove the harness cover bracket D x 1 6 Pull out tray 2 from the mainframe 7 Replace the shoulder screw E with the washer screw F using securing bracket G x 1 1 Connect the harness...

Page 141: ...arness K of the two way harness which has two binds is for the connector of the mainframe The harness M which has one bind is for another optional paper feed unit 4 Clamp the other harness M of the tw...

Page 142: ...ts Slot A is used for one of the optional I F connections only one can be installed IEEE1284 IEEE802 11a g g Wireless LAN Bluetooth or Remote Communication Gate Slot B is used for the File Format Conv...

Page 143: ...d from slot 1 Make sure that the target SD card has enough space 1 Enter SP5873 SD Card Appli Move 2 Then move the application from the SD Card in Slot 2 to the SD Card in Slot 1 Do steps 1 2 again if...

Page 144: ...h off 2 Make sure that an SD card is in SD Card Slot 1 The application program is copied to this SD card 3 Insert the SD card with the application program in SD Card Slot 2 The application program is...

Page 145: ...rom this SD card 4 Turn the main switch on 5 Start the SP mode 6 Select SP5 873 002 Undo Exec 7 Follow the messages shown on the operation panel 8 Turn the main switch off 9 Remove the SD card from SD...

Page 146: ...ine Then push it slowly into slot 1 until you hear a click Only one SD card slot is available for applications provided on SD cards If the customer wants to use two or more applications from SD cards...

Page 147: ...Connections at the end of this section 2 26 4 FILE FORMAT CONVERTER Unplug the main machine power cord before you do the following procedure 1 Remove the slot cover A x 2 2 Install the file format co...

Page 148: ...on 2 26 5 IEEE1284 Installation Procedure Unplug the main machine power cord before you do the following procedure You can only install one of the following network interfaces at a time IEEE 802 11 a...

Page 149: ...rk interfaces at one time IEEE 802 11 a g g Wireless LAN IEEE1284 Bluetooth 1 Remove the slot cover A from the board slot x 2 2 Install the wireless LAN board B Knob screw x 2 into the board slot 3 Ma...

Page 150: ...ke sure that the machine is not located near an appliance or any type of equipment that generates strong magnetic fields Put the machine as close as possible to the access point Installing Hardware Co...

Page 151: ...WEP keys WEP Selects Active or Inactive Inactive is default Range of Allowed Settings 64 bit 10 characters 128 bit 26 characters 9 Transmission Speed Press the Next button to show more settings Then...

Page 152: ...nge of the channel settings for your country 5840 007 Channel MIN Sets the minimum range of the channels settings allowed for your country 5840 011 WEP Key Select Used to select the WEP key Default 00...

Page 153: ...E 802 11 a g g Wireless LAN IEEE1284 Bluetooth 1 Remove the slot cover A x 2 2 Install the Bluetooth board B Knob screw x 2 into the slot A 3 Insert the Bluetooth card into the Bluetooth card adaptor...

Page 154: ...r login password If any of these settings is at a factory default value tell the customer these settings must be changed before you do the installation procedure 3 Make sure that Admin Authentication...

Page 155: ...aces of the tapes do not show VOID remove them from the corners of the box 3 You can see the VOID marks 2 when you remove each seal In this condition they cannot be attached to the box again Installat...

Page 156: ...the operation switch Then turn off the main power switch 9 Turn on the machine power 10 Do SP5990 005 SP print mode Diagnostic Report 11 Make sure the ROM number and firmware version in area a of the...

Page 157: ...overwrite erase icon The icon 2 This icon is lit when there is temporary data to be overwritten and blinks during overwriting The icon 3 This icon is lit when there is no temporary data to be overwrit...

Page 158: ...ure Seal Check and Removal You must check the box seals to make sure that they were not removed after the items were sealed in the box at the factory before you do the installation 1 Check the box sea...

Page 159: ...rear of the machine Then push it slowly into slot 2 until you hear a click 3 Turn on the main power switch and then enter the SP mode 4 Select SP5878 002 and then press Execute on the LCD 5 Exit the S...

Page 160: ...installed updating the encryption key is required 1 Prepare an SD card which is initialized 2 Make the restore_key folder in the SD card 3 Make an nvram_key txt file in the restore_key folder in the...

Page 161: ...tion key clearing the NVRAM is required to recover the HDD encryption unit 1 Prepare an SD card which is initialized 2 Make the restore_key folder in the SD card 3 Make an nvram_key txt file in the re...

Page 162: ...ocedure first if you have the postscript or data overwrite security unit option installed and you want to install the PictBridge unit You must install the USB Host Interface when using the PictBridge...

Page 163: ...d Installation Procedure 1 Switch the machine off 2 Remove the SD card slot cover A x1 3 Turn the SD card label face B to the rear of the machine Then push it slowly into slot 1 until you hear a click...

Page 164: ...tab Stop all SDK applications with touching application lines Exit UP mode turn off the machine and unplug the power cord Remove the slot cover for SD cards A Remove the SD card VM JAVA from SD slot 2...

Page 165: ...on key for Browser Unit to the place you chose in step 18 23 Turn on the main power switch 24 When the reaches the Ready condition press the key that you installed in step 22 Note A message will be di...

Page 166: ...nfirmation message appears on the LCD 13 Touch Yes to uninstall the browser unit 14 You will see Uninstalling the extended feature Please wait and then Completed 15 Touch Exit to go back to the settin...

Page 167: ...ernet controller A into the slot B x 2 2 26 14CHECK ALL CONNECTIONS 1 Plug in the power cord Then turn on the main switch 2 Enter the printer user mode Then print the configuration page User Tools Pri...

Page 168: ......

Page 169: ...PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE SECTION 3 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE REVISION HISTORY Page Date Added Updated New None...

Page 170: ......

Page 171: ...Maintenance Tables SM 3 1 D023 D025 Preventive Maintenance 3 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE 3 1 MAINTENANCE TABLES See Appendices for the following information Preventive Maintenance Items Other Yield Parts...

Page 172: ...n the case of developer the developer initialization will also be done automatically 4 Exit the SP mode Item SP Developer Black 3902 005 Yellow 3902 006 Cyan 3902 007 Magenta 3902 008 Drum Unit Black...

Page 173: ...ck the counter values 3 Make sure that the PM counters for the replaced units are 0 with SP7 803 If the PM counter for a unit was not reset then reset that counter with SP 7 804 4 Make sure that the e...

Page 174: ...test chart This ensures the precise ACC adjustment Close the ARDF or the platen cover Press Start Scanning on the LCD Then the machine starts the ACC 4 Exit the User Tools mode and then enter the SP m...

Page 175: ...REPLACEMENT ADJUSTMENT SECTION 4 REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT REVISION HISTORY Page Date Added Updated New None...

Page 176: ......

Page 177: ...following If there is a fax unit in the machine print out all messages stored in the memory the lists of user programmed items and the system parameter list If there are printer jobs in the machine pr...

Page 178: ...ck Connector Parallel NOTE 1 C401 9503 20X Magnification Scope 1 A257 9300 Grease Barrierta S552R 1 5203 9502 Silicone Grease G 501 1 A092 9503 C4 Color Test Chart 3 pcs set 1 A184 9501 Optics Adjustm...

Page 179: ...nt before you do the following scanner adjustments Use S 2 1 test chart to do the following adjustments Scanner sub scan magnification A Sub scan magnification 1 Put the test chart on the exposure gla...

Page 180: ...ion SP4 010 001 Side to Side Registration SP4 011 001 4 3 2 ARDF ARDF side to side leading edge registration and trailing edge A Leading edge registration Use A3 DLT paper to make a temporary test cha...

Page 181: ...n 5 0 mm SP6 006 005 Buckle Duplex Front 3 0 mm SP6 006 006 Buckle Duplex Rear 2 5 mm SP6 006 007 Rear Edge Erase Trailing Edge 10 0 mm ARDF sub scan magnification 1 Put the temporary test chart on th...

Page 182: ...usts the side to side registration for each paper feed station Use SP mode SP1 002 to adjust the side to side registration for the optional paper feed unit LCT and duplex unit Adjustment Standard Lead...

Page 183: ...3 Do the leading edge registration adjustment 1 Check the leading edge registration and adjust it with SP1 001 2 Select the adjustment conditions paper type and process line speed 3 Input the value T...

Page 184: ...ard values Do the registration adjustment after adjusting the erase margin C and D and then adjust the erase margin A and B 1 Enter SP2 109 003 2 Print out the test pattern 14 1 dot trimming pattern w...

Page 185: ...ring the process A message is displayed at the end Also you can check the result with SP 2 194 10 to 12 You should also do the line position adjustment at these times After you transport or move the m...

Page 186: ...Balance Adjustment The adjustment uses only Offset values Never change Option values default value is 0 Highlight Low ID Levels 2 through 5 in the C4 chart 10 level scale Middle Middle ID Levels 3 thr...

Page 187: ...andard the table below 1 Never change Option value default value is 0 2 Adjust the density in this order ID Max Middle Shadow Highlight Photo Mode Full Color Item to Adjust Level on the C 4 chart Adju...

Page 188: ...color copy Adjust the offset value so that the color balance of black scale levels 3 through 5 in the copy is seen as gray no C M or Y should be visible If the black scale contains C M or Y do steps 1...

Page 189: ...M and Y Adjust the offset value so that the density of level 10 matches that of level 10 on the C 4 chart 2 Middle Middle ID K C M and Y Adjust the offset value so that the density of level 6 matches...

Page 190: ...Highlight Low ID K Adjust the offset value so that dirty background does not show on the copy and the density of level 3 is slightly lighter than that of level 3 on the C 4 chart Text parts of the te...

Page 191: ...stment Procedure 1 Do ACC for the printer mode 2 Turn the main power off and on 3 Enter SP mode 4 Select Printer SP 5 Select SP1 102 001 Then select the necessary print mode to adjust 6 Choose SP1 103...

Page 192: ...Exterior Covers D023 D025 4 16 SM 4 4 EXTERIOR COVERS 4 4 1 FRONT DOOR 1 Open the front door A 2 Remove the two pins B and then remove the front cover...

Page 193: ...Exterior Covers SM 4 17 D023 D025 Replacement Adjustment 4 4 2 LEFT COVER 1 Left cover A x 6 4 4 3 REAR COVER 1 Rear cover A x 8...

Page 194: ...Exterior Covers D023 D025 4 18 SM 4 4 4 RIGHT REAR COVER 1 Rear cover p 4 15 Rear Cover 2 Open the right door A 3 Right rear cover B x 3...

Page 195: ...4 19 D023 D025 Replacement Adjustment 4 4 5 OPERATION PANEL 1 Top left front cover A x 2 2 Open the right door 3 Front right cover B x 1 4 Clip table cover C x 1 5 Top front cover D x 3 6 Operation p...

Page 196: ...ront right cover p 4 16 Operation Panel 2 Paper exit cover A x 1 4 4 7 INNER TRAY 1 Image transfer belt unit p 4 55 Image Transfer Belt Unit 2 Paper exit cover p 4 17 Paper Exit Cover 3 Left cover p 4...

Page 197: ...Exterior Covers SM 4 21 D023 D025 Replacement Adjustment 4 4 8 DUST FILTER 1 Dust filter cover A 2 Two dust filters B...

Page 198: ...Exterior Covers D023 D025 4 22 SM 4 4 9 OZONE FILTER Ozone filters for the scanner unit 1 Scanner right cover A x 2 2 Right top cover B x 1 3 Ozone filters A in the right top cover...

Page 199: ...T 4 5 1 EXPOSURE GLASS 1 Glass cover A x 4 2 ARDF exposure glass B 3 Rear scale C x 3 4 Exposure glass with left scale D Position the white marker E at the rear left corner and the black or blue marke...

Page 200: ...Exposure glass with left scale p 4 20 Exposure Glass 2 Original length sensor bracket A x 1 x1 3 Original length sensors B snap x 1 each 4 The number of the original length sensors depends on the mod...

Page 201: ...AMP 1 Rear cover p 4 15 Rear Cover 2 Operation panel p 4 16 Operation Panel 3 Exposure glass p 4 20 Exposure Glass 4 Scanner rear cover A x 1 5 Scanner left cover B x 2 6 Scanner right cover C x 2 7 D...

Page 202: ...clamps 10 Release the clamp A x 1 11 Remove the pulley B 12 Hold down the snap C and then slide the exposure lamp D to the front side 13 Exposure lamp D Reassembling Run the cable so there is no slac...

Page 203: ...Scanner Unit SM 4 27 D023 D025 Replacement Adjustment 4 5 4 SCANNER MOTOR 1 Rear cover p 4 15 Rear Cover 2 Scanner motor assembly A x 2 spring x 1 3 Scanner motor B x 2 x 1...

Page 204: ...and screw x 1 x 2 x 2 When reassembling Adjust the following SP modes after you replace the sensor board unit SP4 008 Sub Scan Mag See Image Adjustment Scanning SP4 010 Sub Mag Reg See Image Adjustmen...

Page 205: ...4 29 D023 D025 Replacement Adjustment 4 5 6 EXPOSURE LAMP STABILIZER 1 Rear cover p 4 15 Rear Cover 2 Exposure lamp stabilizer A x 2 x 2 4 5 7 SIO SCANNER IN OUT BOARD 1 Rear cover p 4 15 Rear Cover 2...

Page 206: ...NNER HP SENSOR 1 Scanner left cover and scanner rear cover p 4 21 Exposure Lamp 2 Exposure glass p 4 20 Exposure Glass 3 Move the 1st scanner carriage A to the right side 4 Remove the mylar A 5 Remove...

Page 207: ...Scanner Unit SM 4 31 D023 D025 Replacement Adjustment 4 5 9 PLATEN COVER SENSOR 1 Scanner left cover and scanner rear cover p 4 21 Exposure Lamp 2 Platen cover sensor A x 1 x 1...

Page 208: ...M 4 5 10 FRONT SCANNER WIRE 1 Exposure glass p 4 20 Exposure Glass 2 Scanner left stay A x 3 3 Front frame B x 5 4 Front scanner wire clamp A 5 Front scanner wire bracket B x 1 6 Front scanner wire an...

Page 209: ...ough the square hole Pass the left end with the ring C through the notch 3 Wind the right end counterclockwise shown from the machine s front five times Wind the left end clockwise twice The two red m...

Page 210: ...Insert the left end into the slit B The end should go via the rear track of the left pulley C and the rear track of the movable pulley D 6 Hook the right end onto the front scanner wire bracket A The...

Page 211: ...nother scanner positioning pin D through the 1st carriage hole E and the right holes in the front rail F 9 Insert two more scanner positioning pins through the holes in the rear rail 10 Screw the driv...

Page 212: ...g the Rear Scanner Wire 1 Position the center ball A in the middle of the forked holder 2 Pass the left end with the ball B through the drive pulley notch Pass the right end with the ring C through th...

Page 213: ...the three pulleys at the rear of the scanner should be the same as the winding on the three pulleys at the front This must show as a mirror image Example At the front of the machine the side of the d...

Page 214: ...orrectly Do not use items 2 to 9 on the Self Diagnostic Menu These items are for design use only 1 Press S press press 5 times to open the Self Diagnostics menu 2 On the touch screen press Touch Scree...

Page 215: ...s can cause serious eye injury 4 6 1 CAUTION DECAL LOCATION Caution decals are placed as shown below Be sure to turn off the main switch and disconnect the power plug from the power outlet before begi...

Page 216: ...is removed too early you could break the capacitor on the corner of the main frame when you install the new unit Preparing the new laser optics housing unit 1 Polygon motor cover A of the laser optic...

Page 217: ...f you did not do the procedure in Before removing the old laser optics housing before removing the old laser optics housing unit you must do the following 1 Turn off the main power switch and disconne...

Page 218: ...cs D023 D025 4 42 SM Removing the old laser optics housing unit 1 Left cover A x 6 2 Rear fan bracket A for the laser housing optics unit x 2 x 1 3 Front fan bracket B for the laser housing optics uni...

Page 219: ...tects a capacitor on the unit If the bracket is removed too early you could break the capacitor on the corner of the main frame when you install the new unit 1 Push the new laser optics housing unit A...

Page 220: ...e test pattern 14 1 dot trimming pattern in the SP2 109 003 Check that the left and right trim margin is within 4 1 mm If not change the standard value for the main scan magnification adjustment 4 Adj...

Page 221: ...yed at the end Also you can check the result with SP 2 194 10 to 12 7 Exit the SP mode After you replace the housing unit do the adjustments in the following section of the manual Image Adjustment Reg...

Page 222: ...Position Adj Mode c SP2 111 3 2 Then do the Forced Line Position Adj Mode a SP2 111 1 To check if SP 2 111 1 was successful watch the screen during the process A message is displayed at the end Also y...

Page 223: ...he OPC drum Do not let metal objects touch the development sleeve 1 Open the front door 2 Lever lock A x 1 3 Turn the drum positioning plate lever B and the image transfer unit lock lever C counter cl...

Page 224: ...and a front joint at first And use them for reassembling the new drum unit and development unit 1 If you install a new drum unit set SP 3902 xxx to 1 Black 3902 009 Yellow 3902 010 Cyan 3902 011 Mage...

Page 225: ...r removing the front cover The bearing is properly applied with lubricant 5 Remove the bushing A of the development roller at the rear of the PCU x 1 6 Remove the front joint A x 2 x 1 The front joint...

Page 226: ...se color unevenness When the development unit is removed from the drum unit clean the entrance mylar C with a vacuum 9 If you change the development unit do the ACC procedure 10 Execute the drum phase...

Page 227: ...r A 4 hooks Release the three hooks first in the correct order from to Put the head of a screwdriver in the groove gap B as shown and then release the hook Follow the correct order to Otherwise the ho...

Page 228: ...ACC procedure 4 7 3 TONER COLLECTION BOTTLE If you will install a new bottle and the old bottle is not in a full or near full condition then set SP 3902 017 to 1 If you do this then the machine will r...

Page 229: ...25 Replacement Adjustment 4 7 4 SECOND DUCT FAN 1 Rear cover p 4 15 Rear Cover 2 Right rear cover p 4 15 Right Rear Cover 3 Open the controller box p 4 122 Controller Box 4 Second duct A x 2 x 1 x 2 5...

Page 230: ...Image Creation D023 D025 4 54 SM 6 Second duct fan A When reinstalling the second duct fan Make sure that the second duct fan is installed with its decal facing to the front of the machine...

Page 231: ...p 4 15 Rear Cover 2 Right rear cover p 4 15 Right Rear Cover 3 Controller box p 4 122 Controller Box 4 Third duct A x 2 x 1 5 Third duct fan A 3 hooks When reinstalling the third duct fan Make sure th...

Page 232: ...er on the floor before doing this procedure Toner may fall on the floor 1 Front door p 4 15 Rear Cover 2 Image transfer belt unit p 4 55 Image Transfer Belt Unit 3 All PCUs p 4 41 PCU 4 Put a sheet of...

Page 233: ...o the frame of the rear side The picture on the left shows a sheet of paper that is correctly set but the picture on the right shows a sheet of paper that is not correctly set This sheet of paper prev...

Page 234: ...nd fall down 3 Put the toner pump unit on the sheet of paper which has been put in step 4 with its opening A up 4 Keep the opening A of the toner supply tube up and then clip the opening of the toner...

Page 235: ...object that was used to clip the opening of the toner supply tube 3 Insert the opening of the toner pump unit A into the opening of the toner supply tube B as far as possible 4 Connect the harness A...

Page 236: ...ner pump unit behind the hook A while pressing at B 7 Secure the toner supply tube with the holder C lifting up the edge of the holder very gently Be careful when you lift the edge of the holder becau...

Page 237: ...Image Creation SM 4 61 D023 D025 Replacement Adjustment 4 7 7 TONER END SENSOR 1 Rear cover p 4 15 Rear Cover 2 Open the controller box p 4 122 Controller Box 3 Toner end sensor A x 1 2 hooks each...

Page 238: ...T 1 Open the right door 2 Open the front door 3 Open the drum positioning plate p 4 41 PCU 4 Turn the image transfer belt unit lock lever A counterclockwise 5 Pull out the image transfer belt unit B h...

Page 239: ...ne will reset the PM counter for the belt cleaning unit automatically after you turn the power on again Do not use SP3902 015 or 013 if you replace the complete ITB unit 2 Turn off the main power swit...

Page 240: ...unit p 4 55 Image Transfer Belt Cleaning Unit 2 Image transfer belt unit p 4 55 Image Transfer Belt Unit 3 Turn the image transfer unit contact lover A counterclockwise as seen from the rear 4 Gear B...

Page 241: ...ight side of the machine x 2 8 Remove the two screws and then the rear holder bracket A as seen from the rear 9 Remove the two screws and then the front holder bracket A as seen from the front 10 Put...

Page 242: ...transfer belt A When reinstalling the image transfer belt Clean all rollers with dry cloth before installing the image transfer belt There is a rim A at each edge of the transfer belt The ends of all...

Page 243: ...n the belt at the rear side of the unit Put Lubricant Powder B132 9700 on the surface of the image transfer belt A while you turn the drive gear B at a constant speed as shown The straight arrow in th...

Page 244: ...If you will install a new paper transfer unit then set SP 3902 016 to 1 If you do this then the machine will reset the PM counter for the paper transfer unit automatically after you turn the power on...

Page 245: ...it then set SP3 902 016 to 1 If you do this then the machine will reset the PM counter for the paper transfer unit automatically after you turn the power on again 1 Turn off the main power switch 2 Op...

Page 246: ...Paper Transfer D023 D025 4 70 SM 7 Pivot bracket A x 1 8 Paper transfer unit B x 1 2 springs...

Page 247: ...nt Adjustment 4 9 3 HIGH VOLTAGE SUPPLY BOARD DISCHARGE PLATE 1 Open the right door 2 Release the front A and rear pivots of the paper transfer roller case 3 Paper transfer roller case A 4 High voltag...

Page 248: ...the right door 3 Fusing unit p 4 87 Fusing Unit 4 Image transfer belt unit p 4 55 Image Transfer Belt Unit 5 ID sensor unit A x 2 x 2 x 1 6 ID sensor board A x 6 Cleaning for ID sensors ID sensors req...

Page 249: ...eping the ID sensor shutter to the left After installing a new ID sensor unit board Do the following adjustment after installing a new ID sensor unit board 1 Plug in and turn on the main power switch...

Page 250: ...Paper Transfer D023 D025 4 74 SM 4 9 5 TEMPERATURE AND HUMIDITY SENSOR 1 Rear cover p 4 15 Rear Cover 2 Right rear cover p 4 15 Right Rear Cover 3 Temperature and humidity sensor A x 1 x 1...

Page 251: ...or 4 Toner transport motor 5 Drum Development drive motors 6 Paper feed clutch Tray 1 7 Paper feed clutch Tray 2 8 Paper feed motor 9 Registration motor 10 Paper transfer contact motor 11 ITB drive mo...

Page 252: ...p 4 41 2 Image transfer belt unit p 4 55 3 Rear cover p 4 15 4 Open the controller box p 4 122 5 Third duct p 4 48 6 Left cover p 4 15 7 PSU bracket p 4 126 8 Remove the rear stay A x 3 9 Remove thre...

Page 253: ...4 77 D023 D025 Replacement Adjustment 10 Release seven clamps and turn each harness aside 11 Disconnect four connectors red arrows 12 Disconnect two connectors red arrows and put these harnesses insid...

Page 254: ...h connector red circles from the drum development drive motors x 1 x 1 each 14 Disconnect each connector blue circles from the development clutches x 1 each 15 Cover A x 2 16 Disconnect eight connecto...

Page 255: ...it SM 4 79 D023 D025 Replacement Adjustment 17 Release four clamps red circles and turn the harnesses aside 18 Disconnect five connectors red circles x 5 19 Toner transport motor A x 3 20 Pulley A tim...

Page 256: ...Adjustment after replacing the gear unit Do the following procedures after replacing the gear unit 1 Turn on the main power switch 2 Enter Copy SP in the SP mode 3 Do Amplitude Control with SP1 902 00...

Page 257: ...set and that the image transfer belt unit is correctly set Do Amplitude Control again after checking the PCUs and image transfer belt unit When the result is still 1 or 2 after checking the PCUs and i...

Page 258: ...TION MOTOR 1 Rear cover p 4 15 2 Right rear cover p 4 15 3 Ventilation duct p 4 126 4 Turn the harnesses aside x 5 5 Fusing power supply board fan bracket A x 2 x 1 6 Registration motor assembly B x 3...

Page 259: ...Drive Unit SM 4 83 D023 D025 Replacement Adjustment 4 10 3 PAPER FEED MOTOR 1 Rear cover p 4 15 2 Right rear cover p 4 15 3 Release the two clamps 4 Paper feed motor A x 1 x 2 timing belt...

Page 260: ...Unit D023 D025 4 84 SM 4 10 4 DRUM DEVELOPMENT MOTORS FOR M C AND Y 1 Rear cover p 4 15 2 PSU bracket p 4 126 3 Open the controller box 4 Drum Development motors three motors one each for MCY A x 4 x...

Page 261: ...M DEVELOPMENT MOTOR K 1 Rear cover p 4 15 2 PSU bracket p 4 126 3 Open the controller box p 4 122 4 Third duct A x 2 x 1 5 Drum Development motor K B x 4 x 1 4 10 6 ITB DRIVE MOTOR 1 Rear cover p 4 15...

Page 262: ...PAPER EXIT MOTOR 1 Rear cover p 4 15 2 Open the controller box p 4 122 3 Fusing paper exit motor A x 3 x 1 4 10 8 IMAGE TRANSFER BELT CONTACT MOTOR 1 Rear cover p 4 15 2 Open the controller box p 4 1...

Page 263: ...CT MOTOR 1 Rear cover p 4 15 2 Right rear cover p 4 15 3 Open the controller box p 4 122 4 Duplex by pass motor bracket p 4 79 5 Paper transfer contact motor A x 2 x 1 x 1 The picture below shows how...

Page 264: ...X INVERTER MOTOR 1 Open the right door 2 Right door cover right door rear cover p 4 107 3 Duplex door A 2 hooks 4 Duplex guide plate B x 3 2 hooks 5 Duplex inverter motor bracket cover A x 2 x 2 6 Dup...

Page 265: ...Drive Unit SM 4 89 D023 D025 Replacement Adjustment 7 Gear A x 1 belt x 1 8 Duplex inverter motor B x 4...

Page 266: ...D023 D025 4 90 SM 4 10 11DUPLEX BY PASS MOTOR 1 Rear cover p 4 15 2 Right rear cover p 4 15 3 Open the controller box p 4 122 4 Duplex by pass motor bracket A x 2 x 1 x 1 5 Duplex by pass motor A x 4...

Page 267: ...Drive Unit SM 4 91 D023 D025 Replacement Adjustment 4 10 12TONER TRANSPORT MOTOR 1 Rear cover p 4 15 2 Open the controller box p 4 122 3 Toner transport motor A x 3 x 1...

Page 268: ...Drive Unit D023 D025 4 92 SM 4 10 13TONER COLLECTION UNIT 1 Gear Unit p 4 68 2 Toner collection unit A x 6 x 1...

Page 269: ...D025 Replacement Adjustment 4 10 14PAPER FEED CLUTCHES 1 Rear cover p 4 15 2 PSU bracket p 4 126 3 Release five clamps and then turn the harness A aside 4 Paper feed clutch 1 bracket A x 2 x 1 x 1 x 1...

Page 270: ...Drive Unit D023 D025 4 94 SM 6 Paper feed clutch 2 bracket A x 2 x 1 x 1 7 Paper feed clutch 2 A...

Page 271: ...Replacement Adjustment 4 10 15DEVELOPMENT CLUTCH Y 1 Rear cover p 4 15 2 PSU bracket p 4 126 3 Open the controller box p 4 122 4 Drum development motor Y p 4 74 5 Disconnect the connector A x 1 6 Rem...

Page 272: ...Drive Unit D023 D025 4 96 SM 7 Turn the development clutch unit A counter clockwise and then pull it out x 1 8 Development clutch Y B x 1...

Page 273: ...ar cover p 4 15 2 PSU bracket p 4 126 3 Open the controller box p 4 122 4 Drum development motors for M and C p 4 74 5 Disconnect the connector for each development clutch x 1 6 Turn the development c...

Page 274: ...VELOPMENT CLUTCH K 1 Rear cover p 4 15 2 PSU bracket p 4 126 3 Open the controller box p 4 122 4 Drum development motor K p 4 75 5 Turn the development clutch unit A counter clockwise and then pull it...

Page 275: ...Belt and Pressure Roller Fusing Roller p 4 95 Heating Fusing and Tension Roller Bearing p 4 95 Heating Fusing and Tension Roller Pressure Roller p 4 91 Fusing Belt and Pressure Roller Bearing p 4 98...

Page 276: ...mple then set SP 3902 014 to 1 If you do this then the machine will reset the PM counter for the fusing unit automatically after you turn the power on again Do not do this if you replace the complete...

Page 277: ...1 Fusing unit p 4 87 Fusing Unit 2 Fusing upper cover A x 6 These are four stepped screws B on the fusing upper cover 3 Lock lever front and rear A snap ring x 1 spring x 1 each 4 Front side stay A x...

Page 278: ...4 102 SM 7 Release the pressure roller lamp cord A x 1 The color of the fusing lamp cord differs depending on the destination Red 220 240 V Blue 120 V 8 Rear pressure roller lamp stay B x 1 9 Pressur...

Page 279: ...it p 4 87 Fusing Unit 2 Front side stay p 4 88 Pressure Roller Lamp 3 Release the fusing lamp cords A at the front side x 2 4 Front fusing lamp stay B x 1 5 Rear side stay A x 3 6 Release the fusing l...

Page 280: ...87 Fusing Unit 2 Fusing upper cover p 4 88 Pressure Roller Lamp 3 Lock lever front and rear A snap ring x 1 spring x 1 each 4 Top frame A x 4 x 1 5 Pressure roller lamp p 4 88 Pressure Roller Lamp 6...

Page 281: ...5 D023 D025 Replacement Adjustment 8 Stripper plate B 9 Remove the pressure roller gear A C ring x 1 idle gear B and one way clutch gear C C ring 10 Top right frame A x 2 11 Pressure roller A C ring x...

Page 282: ...belt A When reassembling the fusing unit When replacing the fusing roller or pressure roller you have to apply lubricant to the following places Fusing Roller Apply Barrierta S552R to the notch A at...

Page 283: ...ing SM 4 107 D023 D025 Replacement Adjustment Do not apply lubricant to the area C as shown Pressure Roller Apply Barrierta S552R to the front edge A and rear edge B of the pressure roller as shown ab...

Page 284: ...Fusing Belt and Pressure Roller 2 Fusing roller A 3 Tension roller B 4 Heating roller C 4 11 7 HEATING ROLLER THERMOSTATS 1 Fusing upper cover p 4 88 Pressure Roller Lamp 2 Heating roller thermostats...

Page 285: ...D025 Replacement Adjustment 4 11 8 HEATING ROLLER THERMISTOR 1 Fusing upper cover p 4 88 Pressure Roller Lamp 2 Top frame p 4 91 Fusing Belt and Pressure Roller 3 Release the connector A 4 Heating rol...

Page 286: ...11 9 PRESSURE ROLLER THERMISTOR AND THERMOSTAT 1 Fusing upper cover p 4 88 Pressure Roller Lamp 2 Pressure roller p 4 91 Fusing Belt and Pressure Roller 3 Pressure roller thermostats A x 2 4 Pressure...

Page 287: ...ease the idle gear A 5 Release the One way clutch gear B C ring x 1 4 11 11HEATING ROLLER BEARING AND INSULATING BUSHING 1 Fusing unit p 4 87 Fusing Unit 2 Fusing upper cover p 4 88 Pressure Roller La...

Page 288: ...ROLLER BEARING 1 Fusing upper cover p 4 88 Pressure Roller Lamp 2 Front side stay p 4 88 Pressure Roller Lamp 3 Rear side stay p 4 90 Fusing Lamp 4 Pressure roller lamp p 4 88 Pressure Roller Lamp 5...

Page 289: ...cover p 4 15 Rear Cover 3 Right rear cover p 4 15 Right Rear Cover 4 High voltage supply board bracket p 4 128 High Voltage Supply Board Bracket 5 Fusing paper exit fan A x 1 x 1 hook x 2 When Reinsta...

Page 290: ...door 2 Front right cover p 4 16 Operation Panel 3 Fusing unit p 4 87 Fusing Unit 4 Remove the inverter tray A 5 Release the hook D of the inner cover at the inside frame and then remove the inner cove...

Page 291: ...Fusing SM 4 115 D023 D025 Replacement Adjustment 8 Thermopile F x 2 x 1...

Page 292: ...4 12 PAPER FEED 4 12 1 PAPER FEED UNIT 1 Rear cover p 4 15 Rear Cover 2 Right rear cover p 4 15 Right Rear Cover 3 Duplex unit p 4 114 Duplex Unit 4 Pull out tray 1 and tray 2 5 Paper guide plate A h...

Page 293: ...justment 7 Paper feed unit A x 2 x 1 4 12 2 PICK UP FEED AND SEPARATION ROLLERS Tray 1 and Tray 2 1 Paper feed unit p 4 102 Paper Feed Unit 2 Roller holder A x 1 3 Pick up roller B 4 Feed roller C 5 S...

Page 294: ...D025 4 118 SM 4 12 3 TRAY LIFT MOTOR 1 Rear cover p 4 15 Rear Cover 2 PSU bracket p 4 126 3 High voltage supply board bracket p 4 128 High Voltage Supply Board Bracket 4 Tray lift motor 1 A or 2 B x...

Page 295: ...PER END SENSOR 1 Rear cover p 4 15 Rear Cover 2 Right rear cover p 4 15 Right Rear Cover 3 Paper feed unit p 4 102 Paper Feed Unit 4 Paper overflow sensor A 5 Paper end feeler B and paper end sensor C...

Page 296: ...per Feed D023 D025 4 120 SM 4 12 5 REGISTRATION SENSOR 1 Rear cover p 4 15 Rear Cover 2 Right rear cover p 4 15 Right Rear Cover 3 Paper guide plate 1 A and 2 B x 2 each 4 Registration sensor C x 1 ho...

Page 297: ...nt Adjustment 4 12 6 BY PASS PAPER SIZE SENSOR AND BY PASS PAPER LENGTH SENSOR 1 Open the by pass tray A 2 Move the side fences to the center 3 By pass tray cover B x 4 4 By pass paper size sensor A x...

Page 298: ...e hole B in this switch faces the projection C of the left side fence bar 3 Reassemble the copier 4 Plug in and turn on the main power switch 5 Check this switch operation with SP5803 011 By pass pape...

Page 299: ...acement Adjustment 4 12 7 BY PASS BOTTOM TRAY 1 Open the right door 2 By pass tray cover p 4 105 By pass Paper Size Sensor and By pass Paper Length Sensor 3 Open the duplex door A 4 Right door cover B...

Page 300: ...Paper Feed D023 D025 4 124 SM 6 Remove the screw at the front side x 1 7 Remove the cover A 2 hooks 8 Remove the screw at the rear side...

Page 301: ...Paper Feed SM 4 125 D023 D025 Replacement Adjustment 9 Release the front A and rear B arms x 1 each 10 By pass bottom tray A...

Page 302: ...Paper Feed D023 D025 4 126 SM 4 12 8 BY PASS PAPER END SENSOR 1 Right door cover p 4 107 By pass Bottom Tray 2 By pass feed unit cover A x 2 3 By pass paper end sensor B x 1 hook...

Page 303: ...BY PASS PICK UP FEED AND SEPARATION ROLLER TORQUE LIMITER 1 Right door cover p 4 107 By pass Bottom Tray 2 By pass pick up roller A hook 3 By pass feed roller A x 1 4 By pass feed unit cover p 4 109...

Page 304: ...Paper Feed D023 D025 4 128 SM 6 Torque limiter B 4 12 10BY PASS FEED CLUTCH 1 Open the right door 2 Right door rear cover p 4 107 3 By pass feed clutch holder A x 2 4 By pass feed clutch B x 1 x 1...

Page 305: ...3 Image transfer belt unit p 4 55 Image Transfer Belt Unit 4 Inner Tray p 4 17 Inner Tray 5 Thermopile p 4 100 Thermopile 6 Rear cover p 4 15 Rear Cover 7 Right rear cover p 4 15 Right Rear Cover 8 Fu...

Page 306: ...IT PAPER OVERFLOW JUNCTION PAPER JAM AND PAPER EXIT SENSOR 1 Paper exit unit p 4 111 Paper Exit Unit 2 Fusing exit sensor bracket A x 1 x 1 3 Remove the fusing exit sensor from the fusing exit sensor...

Page 307: ...tment 5 Junction paper jam sensor bracket A x 1 x 1 6 Remove the junction paper jam sensor from the junction paper jam sensor bracket hook 7 Paper exit sensor bracket B x 1 x 1 8 Remove the paper exit...

Page 308: ...13 1 DUPLEX UNIT 1 Rear cover p 4 15 2 Right rear cover p 4 15 3 Open the lower door A of the duplex unit 4 Release the tab B and remove the lower door spring x 2 5 Open the right door 6 Release the...

Page 309: ...duplex unit a little bit while pressing the bracket A to lock the spring B Do not let the duplex unit open fully before releasing the wire step 9 Otherwise the lock for the spring B is released 9 Wire...

Page 310: ...cover p 4 114 2 Open the right door 3 Duplex door sensor A x 1 hook 4 13 3 DUPLEX ENTRANCE SENSOR 1 Right door cover p 4 114 2 Open the right door 3 Duplex entrance guide A x1 stepped screw x 2 4 Dup...

Page 311: ...Duplex Unit SM 4 135 D023 D025 Replacement Adjustment 4 13 4 DUPLEX EXIT SENSOR 1 Paper transfer unit p 4 61 Paper Transfer Unit 2 Guide plate A two hooks 3 Duplex exit sensor B x 1 hook...

Page 312: ...D023 D025 4 136 SM 4 14 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS 4 14 1 BOARDS Controller Box closed A IOB B FCU Option C G3 Interface Unit Option D PSU E High Voltage Supply Board Behind the PSU D Behind the IOB FCU a...

Page 313: ...Electrical Components SM 4 137 D023 D025 Replacement Adjustment F BICU G Controller Board H HDD Controller Box Open...

Page 314: ...Electrical Components D023 D025 4 138 SM I ITB Power Supply Board...

Page 315: ...Electrical Components SM 4 139 D023 D025 Replacement Adjustment 4 14 2 CONTROLLER UNIT 1 Controller unit A x 5...

Page 316: ...HT COVER 1 Rear cover p 4 15 Rear Cover 2 Scanner rear cover p 4 21 Exposure Lamp 3 Controller box right cover A x 8 4 14 4 CONTROLLER BOX When opening the controller box 1 Rear cover p 4 15 Rear Cove...

Page 317: ...he controller box A When removing the controller box 1 Rear cover p 4 15 Rear Cover 2 Scanner rear cover p 4 21 Exposure Lamp 3 Right rear cover p 4 15 Right Rear Cover 4 Controller box right cover p...

Page 318: ...t A aside x 4 x All 7 Disconnect the scanner interface cable A ground cable 8 Release all clamps on the controller box frame 9 Disconnect all connectors on the BICU B board 10 Disconnect the connector...

Page 319: ...ement Adjustment 11 Lift up the controller box A and then remove it 4 14 5 IOB IN OUT BOARD 1 Rear cover p 4 15 Rear Cover 2 Scanner rear cover p 4 21 Exposure Lamp 3 Controller box right cover p 4 12...

Page 320: ...the new BICU Remove the NVRAM from the old BICU Then install it on the new BICU after you replace the BICU Replace the NVRAM NVRAM Replacement Procedure in the Appendices if the NVRAM on the old BICU...

Page 321: ...Replacement Adjustment 4 14 7 PSU PSU bracket 1 Rear cover p 4 15 Rear Cover 2 Ventilation duct A x 2 3 PSU bracket B x 6 x All x All PSU board 1 Rear cover p 4 15 Rear Cover 2 Ventilation duct see PS...

Page 322: ...er p 4 15 Rear Cover 2 Scanner rear cover p 4 21 Exposure Lamp 3 Open the controller box p 4 122 Controller Box 4 ITB power supply board A x 5 x 6 4 14 9 HIGH VOLTAGE SUPPLY BOARD 1 Rear cover p 4 15...

Page 323: ...cal Components SM 4 147 D023 D025 Replacement Adjustment 4 14 10HIGH VOLTAGE SUPPLY BOARD BRACKET 1 Rear cover p 4 15 Rear Cover 2 PSU bracket p 4 126 PSU 3 High voltage supply board bracket A x 3 x A...

Page 324: ...TROLLER BOARD 1 Controller unit p 4 121 Controller Unit 2 Controller board A x 7 x 3 3 Interface rails A NV RAM B RAM DIMM C When installing the new controller board Remove the NVRAM from the old cont...

Page 325: ...ng Data before you replace the NVRAM Keep NVRAMs away from any objects that can cause static electricity Static electricity can damage NVRAM data Make sure the NVRAM is correctly installed on the cont...

Page 326: ...tamp data using SP5853 3 Switch the machine off and on to enable the fixed stamps for use Disposal of HDD Units Never remove an HDD unit from the work site without the consent of the client If the cus...

Page 327: ...DD is replaced Document server documents Custom made stamps Document server address book The address book and document server documents if needed must be input again If you previously backed up the ad...

Page 328: ...the serial number and destination code SC 999 or Fusing Unit Setting Error can be shown until the serial number and destination code are correctly programmed 11 Turn the main switch off and on 12 Copy...

Page 329: ...the power cord Then turn the main switch on 11 Copy the data from the SD card to the NVRAM SP5 825 001 and HDD SP5 846 52 if you have successfully copied them to the SD card The counter data in the u...

Page 330: ...SWITCHES 4 15 1 CONTROLLER BOARD DIP SW No OFF ON 1 Boot up from Flash Memory Boot up from SD card 2 to 8 Factory Use Only Do not change the switch settings 4 15 2 BICU BOARD DIP SW No OFF ON 1 and 2...

Page 331: ...SYSTEM MAINTENANCE REFERENCE SECTION 5 SYSTEM MAINTENANCE REFERENCE REVISION HISTORY Page Date Added Updated New None...

Page 332: ......

Page 333: ...em SP Tables Printer SP Tables Scanner SP Tables 5 1 2 ENABLING AND DISABLING SERVICE PROGRAM MODE The Service Program Mode is for use by service representatives only If this mode is used by anyone ot...

Page 334: ...er functions Fax SP SP modes related to the fax functions Select one of the Service Program modes System Printer Scanner or Fax from the touch panel as shown in the diagram below after you access the...

Page 335: ...isplay in segments the size of the screen display page Press to scroll the show the previous or next line line by line Press to move the highlight on the left to the previous or next selection in the...

Page 336: ...to complete the selection 2 If you need to perform a test print press Copy Window to open the copy window and select the settings for the test print Press Start C and then press SP Mode highlighted i...

Page 337: ...will then set the Service Mode Lock to ON 5 1 4 REMARKS Display on the Control Panel Screen The maximum number of characters which can show on the control panel screen is limited to 30 characters For...

Page 338: ...e turned off and on to effect the setting change An asterisk to the right hand side of the mode number column means that this mode is stored in the NVRAM If you do a RAM clear this SP mode will be res...

Page 339: ...gine control BICU Flash ROM Engine System Copy Application Operating system Flash ROM on the controller board System Copy Netfile Application Feature application Flash ROM on the controller board Netw...

Page 340: ...G WebDocBox Document server application Flash ROM on the controller board Web Uapl WebSys Web Service application Flash ROM on the controller board Web Support PS3 Page description language PostScript...

Page 341: ...bration Make sure that the write protection of an SD card is unlocked when you download an application to it If not downloading fails and a download error e g Error Code 44 occurs during a firmware up...

Page 342: ...into the slot so it locks in place You will hear it click Make sure the SD card locks in place To remove the SD push it in to unlock the spring lock Then release it so it pops out of the slot 5 Discon...

Page 343: ...updating The message differs depending on the firmware that has been updated 10 Switch the copier main power switch off when you see the Update is Done message or follow the procedure that is displaye...

Page 344: ...he card without the menu display 5 2 4 UPDATING THE LCDC FOR THE OPERATION PANEL Do the following procedure to update the LCDC LCD Control Board 1 Turn the copier main switch off 2 Remove the SD slot...

Page 345: ...the hard disks have been replaced The print data contains the controller software Execute SP 5853 to download the fixed stamp data required by the hard disks 1 Enter the SP mode 2 Select SP5853 and th...

Page 346: ...upload procedure is finished The file is saved to the path and the following filename NVRAM serial number NV Here is an example with Serial Number K5000017114 NVRAM K5000017114 NV 7 In order to preven...

Page 347: ...copier main power switch on 5 Do SP5825 001 NVRAM Data Download and press the Execute key The serial number of the file on the SD card must match the serial number of the machine for the NVRAM data to...

Page 348: ...write protection on the SD card is off 3 Turn off the main power switch of the main machine 4 Remove the SD slot cover at the left rear side of the machine x 1 5 Install the SD card into SD card slot...

Page 349: ...Turn on the main power switch 5 Enter the SP mode 6 Do SP5 846 052 Restore All Addr Book 7 Exit the SP mode and then turn off the main power switch 8 Remove the SD card form SD card slot 2 9 Install t...

Page 350: ...t 3 4 Switch the copier main power switch on The initial screen opens after about 45 seconds 5 Touch Language Data 2 on the screen or press 6 Touch LANG 1 1 or LANG 2 2 Key What it does LANG 1 1 Touch...

Page 351: ...reen 9 If you do not see the language that you want to select touch 7 or 9 on the screen or press or to show more choices The Download Screen opens after you select a language The 1st or 2nd language...

Page 352: ...downloading The following occur at the time the language is downloading The operation panel switches off The LED on the power on key flashes rapidly 11 After the message of installation completed has...

Page 353: ...econd attempt fails replace controller board 24 SD card access error Make sure SD card inserted correctly or use another SD card 30 No HDD available for stamp data download HDD connection incorrect or...

Page 354: ...d and try again or replace the BICU board 42 Operation panel module download failed Replace the update data for the module on the SD card and try again or replace the LCDC 43 Stamp data module downloa...

Page 355: ...ge data into SD Card Slot 2 4 Switch the copier main power switch on The initial screen opens after about 45 seconds 5 Touch Language Data 2 on the screen or press 6 Touch LANG 1 1 or LANG 2 2 Key Wha...

Page 356: ...age that you want to select touch 7 or 9 on the screen or press or to show more choices The Download Screen opens after you select a language The 1st or 2nd language selected for updating shows The fo...

Page 357: ...ng The following occur at the time the language is downloading The operation panel switches off The LED on the power on key flashes rapidly 11 After the message of installation completed has shown on...

Page 358: ...2 SYSTEM SETTINGS AND COPY SETTING RESET System Setting Reset The system settings in the UP mode can be reset to their defaults Use the following procedure 1 Press User Tools Counter 2 Hold down and...

Page 359: ...5 27 D023 D025 System Maintenance Reference 3 Press Yes when the message prompts you to confirm that you want to reset the Copier Document Server settings 4 Press exit when the message tells you that...

Page 360: ...agnostics for the controller 1 Power on self diagnostics The machine automatically starts the self diagnostics just after the power has been turned on 2 SC detection The machine automatically detects...

Page 361: ...d The destination SD card should have the largest memory size of all the application SD cards Refer to the following table for the memory size of each SD card Outline of SD Card Appli Move 1 Choose a...

Page 362: ...ON the write protect switch of an application SD card on the machine If the write protect switch is ON a download error e g Error Code 44 occurs during a firmware upgrade or application merge 1 Turn...

Page 363: ...ng a firmware upgrade or application merge 1 Turn the main switch off 2 Insert the original SD card in SD Card Slot 2 The application program is copied back into this card 3 Insert the SD card having...

Page 364: ...ks have been replaced The print data contains the controller software Execute SP 5853 to download the fixed stamp data required by the hard disks 1 Enter the SP mode 2 Select SP5853 and then press EXE...

Page 365: ...ch the copier main power switch off 3 Remove the SD slot cover x 1 4 Insert the SD card into SD card slot 2 Then switch the copier on 5 Execute SP5824 001 NVRAM Data Upload and then press the Execute...

Page 366: ...mpt fails Enter the NVRAM data manually using the SMC print you created before uploading the NVRAM data 1 Switch the copier main power switch off 2 Remove the SD slot cover x 1 3 Insert the SD card wi...

Page 367: ...d 2 Make sure that the write protection on the SD card is off 3 Turn off the main power switch of the main machine 4 Remove the SD slot cover at the left rear side of the machine x 1 5 Install the SD...

Page 368: ...on the main power switch 5 Enter the SP mode 6 Do SP5 846 052 Restore All Addr Book 7 Exit the SP mode and then turn off the main power switch 8 Remove the SD card form the SD card slot 2 9 Install th...

Page 369: ...y But this information is lost when the machine is switched off and on To capture this debug information the Save Debug Log feature provides two main features Switching on the debug feature so error i...

Page 370: ...panel open SP5857 2 Under 5857 Save Debug Log touch 1 On Off 3 On the control panel keypad press 1 Then press This switches the Save Debug Log feature on The default setting is 0 OFF This feature must...

Page 371: ...s debug data when a controller related SC Code is generated 3 Any SC Error Saves data only for the SC code that you specify by entering code number 4 Jam Saves data for jams More than one event can be...

Page 372: ...rd Enter the appropriate 4 digit number Then press Refer to the two tables below for the 4 digit numbers to enter for each key The example below shows Key 1 with 2222 entered The following keys can be...

Page 373: ...tem Resource Management NCS Network Control Service WebDB Web Document Box Document Server 1 The machine is now set to record the debugging information automatically on the HDD the target selected wit...

Page 374: ...n only One area of the disk is reserved to store the debug log The size of this area is limited to 4 MB 5 10 3 RETRIEVING THE DEBUG LOG FROM THE HDD Retrieve the debug log by copying it from the hard...

Page 375: ...rieval with an SD card by the service representatives 3 Switch the machine off and on to resume operation The debug information for the error is saved on the hard disk This lets the service representa...

Page 376: ...reated To create a new log file do SP5857 011 to delete the debug log data from the HDD Then do SP5857 016 SP5857 017 Create a File on SD Card to Store a Log This SP creates a 4 MB file to store a log...

Page 377: ...0 prn to PRT99999 prn An additional file PRT CTL will be created This file contains a list of all files created on the card by the card save function Previously stored files on the SD card can be over...

Page 378: ...ode 4 Select the Printer Sp 5 Select SP 1001 Bit Switch 6 Select Bit Switch 1 Settings and use the numeric keypad to turn bit 4 ON and then press the button to register the change The result should lo...

Page 379: ...D023 D025 System Maintenance Reference 9 Select Printer Features 10 Card Save Add and Card Save New should be displayed on the screen Select Card Save Add or Card Save New 11 Press OK and then exit t...

Page 380: ...button 13 Card Save should be displayed in the top left of the display panel 14 Send a job to the printer The Communicating light should start blinking as shown below 15 As soon as the printer receive...

Page 381: ...een indicating that a Card Save operation was successful 16 Press Offline and then the Clear Stop button to exit Card Save mode 17 Change the Bit Switch Settings back to the default 00000000 Press the...

Page 382: ...n change to kernel mode failed to initialize Card not found Card cannot be detected in the slot No memory Insufficient working memory to process the job Write error Failed to write to the card Other e...

Page 383: ...TROUBLESHOOTING SECTION 6 TROUBLESHOOTING REVISION HISTORY Page Date Added Updated New None...

Page 384: ......

Page 385: ...Service Call Conditions SM 6 1 D023 D025 Trouble shooting 6 TROUBLESHOOTING 6 1 SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS See Appendices for the following information SC Tables...

Page 386: ...Error Conditions D023 D025 6 2 SM 6 2 PROCESS CONTROL ERROR CONDITIONS See Appendices for the following information Developer Initialization Result Process Control Self Check Result Line Position Adj...

Page 387: ...e following information Image Quality Line Position Adjustment 6 3 1 STACK PROBLEM IN THE 1 BIN TRAY If a stack problem occurs on the 1 bin tray raise the guide on the 1 bin tray If a stack problem oc...

Page 388: ...Jam Detection D023 D025 6 4 SM 6 4 JAM DETECTION See Appendices for the following information Paper Jam Display Jam Codes and Display Codes Paper Size Code Sensor Locations...

Page 389: ...Electrical Component Defects SM 6 5 D023 D025 Trouble shooting 6 5 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DEFECTS See Appendices for the following information Sensors Blown Fuse Conditions Power Supply Unit...

Page 390: ...test ends Then the completion code shows in the operation panel display If an error is detected the test is interrupted Then an error code shows The table below lists the completion and error codes SP...

Page 391: ...onment is inappropriate for the board the scanner unit 5 Static electricity Static electricity of a high voltage occurs during the test 6 Others The scanner and BICU are incorrectly connected When you...

Page 392: ......

Page 393: ...D023 D025 SERVICE MANUAL APPENDICES...

Page 394: ......

Page 395: ...N ARDF ORIGINAL SIZE DETECTION 1 22 1 5 SOFTWARE ACCESSORIES 1 24 1 5 1 PRINTER DRIVERS 1 24 1 5 2 SCANNER AND LAN FAX DRIVERS 1 25 1 5 3 UTILITY SOFTWARE 1 26 1 6 OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT 1 27 1 6 1 ARDF D...

Page 396: ...her Punch Kit B807 2 8 1000 Sheet Finisher B408 2 8 1 Bin Tray D414 2 9 Bridge Unit D386 2 9 Shift Tray D388 2 9 2 1 2 OTHERS YIELD PARTS 2 10 Mainframe 2 10 ARDF 2 10 3 APPENDIX SERVICE CALL CONDITIO...

Page 397: ...5 3 Countermeasure list for color registration errors 5 3 6 APPENDIX JAM DETECTION 6 1 6 1 JAM DETECTION 6 1 6 1 1 PAPER JAM DISPLAY 6 1 6 1 2 JAM CODES AND DISPLAY CODES 6 2 Paper Size Code 6 10 Sen...

Page 398: ...ble 2 Paper Size Switch Tray 2 8 432 Table 3 Paper Size By pass Table 8 433 Table 4 APS Original Size Detection 8 434 8 1 3 OUTPUT CHECK TABLE 8 435 Copier 8 435 ARDF B802 8 445 1000 Sheet Booklet Fin...

Page 399: ...Appendix Specifications APPENDIX 1 SPECIFICATIONS Page Date Added Updated New 30 06 26 2009 Saddlestitch...

Page 400: ......

Page 401: ...ME Configuration Desktop Print Process Laser beam scanning Dry electrostatic transfer system 4 drums tandem method Number of scans 1 Resolution Scan 600 dpi Print 600 dpi Gradation Scan 600dpi 10bits...

Page 402: ...C2a 16 cpm color black white C2b 16 cpm color black white OHP Glossy 1200 dpi C2a 16 cpm color black white C2b 16 cpm color black white First copy normal mode C2a b Color 8 seconds or less A4 LT LEF...

Page 403: ...x 210mm Printing Paper Weight Standard tray 60 to 256 g m2 16 to 68 lb Optional paper tray 60 to 256 g m2 16 to 68 lb By pass tray 60 to 256 g m2 16 to 68 lb Duplex unit 60 to 169 g m2 16 to 45 lb LCT...

Page 404: ...1 step Fixed North America Europe 25 25 50 50 65 61 73 71 78 82 85 87 93 93 100 100 121 115 129 122 155 141 200 200 Zoom 400 400 Memory Standard 1024 MB Power Source 120 V 60 Hz More than 12A for Nor...

Page 405: ...s Color 70 4 dB A or Less Standby 40 dB A or Less 46 9 dB A or Less B W 67 6 dB A or Less Noise Emission Sound Power Level C2b Operating Color 67 9 dB A or Less Color 71 9 dB A or Less 1 The complete...

Page 406: ...its 1200 x 1200 dpi RPCS 600 x 600 dpi 1 800 x 600 dpi 9600 dpi x 600 dpi 1 800 x 600 dpi 600 x 600 dpi 2 bits 9600 dpi x 600 dpi 600 x 600 dpi 4 bits PS3 600 x 600 dpi Fast 1 bit Standard 2 bits Fine...

Page 407: ...Standard USB Host PictBridge Optional Ethernet 100 Base TX 10 Base T Standard Gigabit Ethernet 1000 Base T Optional IEEE1284 parallel x 1 Optional IEEE802 11a g g Wireless LAN Optional Bluetooth Wirel...

Page 408: ...300 400 600 dpi Grayscales 1 bit or 8 bits pixel each for RGB Scanning Throughput ARDF mode Scan to E mail Folder BW 50 ppm A4LEF BW Text Print 200dpi Compression On MH FC 50 ppm A4LEF FC Text Photo...

Page 409: ...00 sheet DU Duplex Unit Paper Size W x L BT T1 T2 3 4 LCT 2000 LCT 1200 DU A3 W 12 x 18 M A3 SEF 297 x 420mm M M M A4 SEF 210 x 297mm M A M A4 LEF 297 x 210mm M S M S S M A5 SEF 148 x 210mm M A5 LEF 2...

Page 410: ...gal SEF 8 25 x 14 M M M Half Letter SEF 5 5 x 8 5 A Executive SEF 7 25 x 10 5 M M M Executive LEF 10 5 x 7 25 M A M F SEF 8 x 13 M M M Foolscap SEF 8 5 x 13 M M M 8 25 x 13 M M M 11 x 15 M M M 10 x 14...

Page 411: ...3 4 LCT 2000 LCT 1200 DU Com10 Env 4 125 x 9 5 M Monarch Env 3 875 x 7 5 M C6 Env 114 x 162mm M C5 Env 162 x 229mm M DL Env 110 x 220mm M Remarks A Supported the sensor detects the paper size M Suppor...

Page 412: ...4 LCT 2000 LCT 1200 DU A3 W 12 x 18 M A3 SEF 297 x 420mm A A M A4 SEF 210 x 297mm A A M A4 LEF 297 x 210mm A M A M S M A5 SEF 148 x 210mm A A5 LEF 210 x 148mm A S A M A6 SEF 105 x 148mm A B4 SEF 257 x...

Page 413: ...EF 7 25 x 10 5 M M M Executive LEF 10 5 x 7 25 M M M F SEF 8 x 13 M M M Foolscap SEF 8 5 x 13 M M M 8 25 x 13 M M M 11 x 15 M M M 10 x 14 M M M Folio SEF 8 x 10 M M M 8K 267 x 390mm M M M 16K SEF 195...

Page 414: ...rted Paper Sizes D023 D025 1 14 SM Appendix Remarks A Supported the sensor detects the paper size M Supported the user specifies the paper size S Supported depends on a technician adjustment Not suppo...

Page 415: ...2 3 P 4 P N4P A3 W 12 x 18 Y Y Y Y Y Y A3 SEF 297 x 420 mm Y Y Y Y 30 30 Y Y Y A4 SEF 210 x 297 mm Y Y Y Y 50 50 Y A4 LEF 297 x 210 mm Y Y Y Y 50 50 Y Y Y A5 SEF 148 x 210 mm Y Y Y Y Y A5 LEF 210 x 14...

Page 416: ...Executive LEF 10 5 x 7 25 Y Y Y Y 50 Y Y Y F SEF 8 x 13 Y Y Y Y 30 Y Foolscap SEF 8 5 x 13 Y Y Y Y 30 Y 8 25 x 13 Y Y Y Y 30 Y 11 x 15 Y Y Y Y 30 Y Y Y 10 x 14 Y Y Y Y 30 Y Y Folio SEF 8 x 10 Y Y Y Y...

Page 417: ...Supported Paper Sizes SM Appendix 1 17 D023 D025 Appendix Specifications Remarks Y Supported 30 Output up to 30 sheets 50 Output up to 50 sheets Not supported...

Page 418: ...lr Shf Stp 1 Bin Shift A3 W 12 x 18 Y Y Y Y A3 SEF 297 x 420 mm Y Y Y Y 30 Y Y 30 Y Y A4 SEF 210 x 297 mm Y Y Y Y 50 Y Y 50 Y Y A4 LEF 297 x 210 mm Y Y Y Y 50 Y Y 50 Y Y A5 SEF 148 x 210 mm Y Y Y Y Y...

Page 419: ...8 5 Y Y Y Y 50 Y Y 50 Y Y Legal SEF 8 5 x 14 Y Y Y Y 30 Y Y 30 Y Y Government Legal SEF 8 25 x 14 Y Y Y Y Y Y 30 Y Y Half Letter SEF 5 5 x 8 5 Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Executive SEF 7 25 x 10 5 Y Y Y Y 50 Y Y...

Page 420: ...Shf Stp Clr Shf Stp 1 Bin Shift 8K 267 x 390 mm Y Y Y Y 30 Y Y 30 Y Y 16K SEF 195 x 267 mm Y Y Y Y 50 Y Y 50 Y Y 16K LEF 267 x 195 mm Y Y Y Y 50 Y Y 50 Y Y Custom Y Y Y Com10 Env 4 125 x 9 5 Y Y Y Y...

Page 421: ...Supported Paper Sizes SM Appendix 1 21 D023 D025 Appendix Specifications Remarks Y Supported 30 Output up to 30 sheets 50 Output up to 50 sheets Not supported...

Page 422: ...tric A3 297 x 420 L Y Y 3 Y B4 257 x 364 L Y 3 Y A4 210 x 297 L Y 1 Y Y 3 Y A4 297 x 210 S Y 3 Y Y 3 Y B5 182 x 257 L Y 3 Y B5 257 x 182 S Y 3 Y A5 148 x 210 L 1 Y A5 210 x 148 S 1 Y B6 128 x 182 L B6...

Page 423: ...16K L 195 x 267 Y 3 Y 2 16K S 267 x 195 Y 3 Y 2 7 25 x 10 5 Executive Y 10 5 x 7 25 Executive Y 2 1 Use SP4 303 to detect original sizes as A5 lengthwise HLT when the message Can t detect original si...

Page 424: ...1 or later PCL5c PCL6 Yes Yes Yes No PS3 2 Yes Yes Yes Yes RPCS Yes Yes Yes No The PCL5c 6 and RPCS drivers are provided on the printer drivers CD ROM The PS drivers are provided on the Scanner PostS...

Page 425: ...2000 XP Server 2003 Vista MacOS8 6 to 9 x MacOSX10 1 or later Network TWAIN Yes Yes Yes No LAN FAX Yes Yes Yes No The Network TWAIN and LAN Fax drivers are provided on the scanner drivers CD ROM This...

Page 426: ...nt utility for client users A utility for peer to peer printing over a NetBEUI or TCP IP network A peer to peer print utility over a TCP IP network This provides the parallel printing and recovery pri...

Page 427: ...8 lb Table Capacity 50 sheets 80 g m2 20 lb Original Standard Position Rear left corner Separation Feed belt and separation roller Original Transport Roller transport Original Feed Order From the top...

Page 428: ...ion 55W Dimensions W x D x H 580 mm x 620 mm x 120 mm 22 8 x 24 4 x 4 7 Weight Less than 15 kg 1 6 3 PAPER FEED UNIT D351 Paper Feed System FRR Paper Height Detection 5 steps 100 70 30 10 Near end and...

Page 429: ...Source DC 24 V 5 V from copier printer Power Consumption 55 W Max 30 W Ave Weight 26 kg 57 3 lb Size W x D x H 580 mm x 620 mm x 260 mm 22 8 x 24 4 x 10 2 1 6 5 LCT 1200 SHEET D353 Paper Size A4 LEF L...

Page 430: ...5 x 8 5 SEF Staple mode A3 11 x 17 to B5 8 5 x 11 Paper Weight No punch mode 52 to 256 g m2 14 to 68 lb Shift tray 52 to 105 g m2 14 to 28 lb Proof tray Punch mode 52 to 163 g m2 14 to 43 lb Staple m...

Page 431: ...ion 3 positions 1 staple 2 positions Top Left Top Right 2 staples 1 positions Staple replenishment Cartridge 5000 staples Power consumption 60 W Dimensions W x D x H 535 mm x 600 mm x 930 mm 21 1 x 23...

Page 432: ...1 6 7 1000 SHEET FINISHER B408 Upper Tray Paper Size A3 to A6 11 x 17 to 5 5 x 8 5 Paper Weight 60 to 157 g m2 16 to 42 lb Paper Capacity 250 sheets A4 LEF 8 5 x 11 SEF or smaller 50 sheets A4 8 5 x...

Page 433: ...smaller 80 g m2 20 lb 500 sheets A3 B4 DLT LG 80 g m2 20 lb Staple mode 80 g m2 20 lb number of sets Set Size 10 to 50 Size 2 to 9 10 to 30 31 to 50 A4 LT LEF B5 LEF 100 100 to 20 100 to 20 A4 LT SEF...

Page 434: ...ets A4 LT or smaller Staple position 3 positions 1 staple 2 positions Top right oblique Top left oblique 2 staples 1 positions Left Staple replenishment Cartridge 5000 staples 500 Sheet Finisher Targe...

Page 435: ...s Front Oblique 1 Front Parallel 1 Rear Oblique 1 Rear Parallel 1 2 locations Output Tray Capacity Non staple Mode 500 sheets A4 LT and smaller Staple Mode 250 sheets B4 LG and larger Stack Size Stapl...

Page 436: ...RIDGE UNIT D386 Paper Size Standard sizes A6 SEF to A3 HLT to DLT Non standard sizes Width 90 to 305 mm Length 148 to 600 mm Paper Weight 52 g m2 to 256 g m2 16 lb to 68 lb Paper Capacity 125 sheets 8...

Page 437: ...h 148 to 600 mm Paper Weight 52 256 g m2 14 68 lbs Power Consumption Max 10W Power is supplied from the mainframe Dimension W x D x H 423 mm x 468 mm x 114 mm 16 7 x 18 4 x 4 5 Weight Approx 2kg 4 4lb...

Page 438: ......

Page 439: ...Appendix Maintenance Tables APPENDIX 2 MAINTENANCE TABLES REVISION HISTORY Page Date Added Updated New None...

Page 440: ......

Page 441: ...0 Environment Normal temperature and humidity Yield may change depending on circumstances and print conditions Symbol keys C Clean R Replace L Lubricant I Inspect Mainframe Item 120K 240K 360K 480K 60...

Page 442: ...K C M Y R Developer K R Transfer Image transfer belt cleaning unit R Paper Transfer Roller Unit R Toner Collection Bottle R Fusing Heating Roller R Bearing R Insulating Bushing R Fusing Belt R Fusing...

Page 443: ...Alcohol Exit Guide Plate C Alcohol Thermopile C Cotton swab with alcohol Paper Path Registration Roller C Damp cloth Registration Sensor C Dry cloth Vertical Transport Roller C Damp cloth Vertical Tr...

Page 444: ...ks Paper Dust Container C C Duplex Unit Inverter Roller C Damp cloth Transport Roller C Damp cloth Duplex Entrance Sensor C Dry cloth Duplex Exit Sensor C Dry cloth Miscellaneous Dust Filter R Dust Gl...

Page 445: ...r C Damp cloth alcohol Replace if required White Plate C Dry or damp cloth Drive Gear L Grease G501 Transport Roller C Damp cloth alcohol Exit Roller C Damp cloth alcohol Inverter Roller C Damp cloth...

Page 446: ...dix Two tray Paper Feed Unit D351 Item EM Remarks Feed Roller C Dry cloth Separation Roller C Dry cloth Pick up Roller C Dry cloth Paper Feed Sensor C Dry cloth Relay Sensor C Dry cloth Relay Roller C...

Page 447: ...ick up Roller C Dry cloth Paper Feed Sensor C Dry cloth Relay Sensor C Dry cloth Relay Roller C Damp cloth Bottom Plate Pad C Damp cloth 2000 sheet LCT D352 Item EM Remarks Feed Roller C Dry cloth Sep...

Page 448: ...EM Remarks Rollers C Damp cloth Discharge Brush C Dry cloth Sensors C Blower brush 1000 Sheet Booklet Finisher Punch Kit B807 Items EM Remarks Punch Chads C Discard chads 1000 Sheet Finisher B408 Item...

Page 449: ...Appendix Maintenance Tables 1 Bin Tray D414 Items EM Remarks Rollers C Damp cloth Tray C Damp cloth Sensor C Blower brush Bearing C S552R Bridge Unit D386 Items EM Remarks Rollers C Damp cloth Shift...

Page 450: ...the machine s targeted lifetime if the machine is used under the target usage conditions ACV color ratio P J and C O So these parts are categorized not as PM parts but as yield parts EM parts Mainfram...

Page 451: ...Conditions APPENDIX 3 SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS REVISION HISTORY Page Date Added Updated New 52 56 4 27 2011 SC681 55 05 13 2009 SC724 72 74 08 28 2009 SC824 72 95 10 06 2010 Added SC821 822 823 826 thr...

Page 452: ......

Page 453: ...Reset Procedure Controller errors CTL The error has occurred in the controller See Troubleshooting Procedure in the table A The error involves the fusing unit The machine operation is disabled The use...

Page 454: ...de can check the latest 10 SC codes detected and total counters when the SC code is detected If the problem concerns electrical circuit boards first disconnect then reconnect the connectors before you...

Page 455: ...50 Development 3XX Image development 1 380 Unique for a specific model 400 Image transfer 420 Paper separation 430 Cleaning 440 Around drum 460 Unit 4XX Image development 2 480 Others 500 Paper feed 5...

Page 456: ...ol 640 CSS 650 Network 670 Internal data processing 6XX Communication 680 Unique for a specific model 700 Original handling 720 Two tray finisher 7XX Peripherals 740 Booklet finisher 800 Error after r...

Page 457: ...digits 8 bits when scanning the shading plate Exposure lamp defective Lamp stabilizer defective Exposure lamp connector defective Standard white plate dirty Scanner mirror or scanner lens out of posi...

Page 458: ...r motor 2 Check the cable connection between the SIO and HP sensor 3 Replace the scanner motor 4 Replace the HP sensor No Type Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures Scanner home po...

Page 459: ...ils Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures White level detection error The white level cannot be adjusted within the target during auto gain control Dirty exposure glass or optics section S...

Page 460: ...ction port on the BICU 144 D 1 Replace the harness 2 Replace the SBU 3 Replace the BICU No Type Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures 161 D IPU error The error result of self diagn...

Page 461: ...ction is set ON with the initial setting Incorrect installation of the copy data security board Defective copy data security board 165 D 1 Reinstall the copy data security board 2 Replace the copy dat...

Page 462: ...polygon motor driver board Defective polygon motor 202 D 1 Replace the polygon motor 2 Replace the laser optics housing unit 3 Replace the harness 4 Replace the BICU No Type Details Symptom Possible C...

Page 463: ...shooting Procedures 210 C Laser synchronizing detection error end position K 211 C Laser synchronizing detection error end position Y 212 C Laser synchronizing detection error end position M 213 C Las...

Page 464: ...ly Disconnected cable from the laser synchronizing detection unit or defective connection Defective laser synchronizing detector Defective LDB Defective BICU 1 Check the connectors 2 Replace the laser...

Page 465: ...details No Type Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures FGATE ON error Y The PFGATE ON signal does not assert within 5 seconds after processing the image in normal job or MUSIC for...

Page 466: ...nd position M The PFGATE ON signal still asserts when the next job starts 235 D See SC 230 for troubleshooting details No Type Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures FGATE ON error...

Page 467: ...housing unit 3 Replace the BICU No Type Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures Line position adjustment MUSIC error Line position adjustment fails four consecutive times Pattern sa...

Page 468: ...put error M 302 D AC charge output error C 303 D AC charge output error Y The measured voltage is not proper when IOB measures the charge output for each color Disconnected or broken high voltage cabl...

Page 469: ...yan or yellow TD sensor exceeds the specified value default 4 7V with SP3020 002 for twenty counts The Vt Vtref value of the black magenta cyan or yellow TD sensor exceeds the specified value default...

Page 470: ...rror 2 Y The Vt value of the black magenta cyan or yellow TD sensor is below the specified value with SP3020 004 default 0 5V for 10 counts TD sensor harness disconnected loose defective A drawer conn...

Page 471: ...ensor adjustment error Y During TD sensor initialization the output value of the black magenta cyan or yellow TD sensor is not within the range of the specified value with SP3238 001 to 004 default 2...

Page 472: ...gear position sensor 2 Replace the PCU No Type Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures 396 D Drum Development motor error K 397 D Drum Development motor error M 398 D Drum Developmen...

Page 473: ...tive ID sensor Defective ID sensor shutter 400 D 1 Check the harness of the ID sensor 2 Clean or replace the ID sensor After replacing the ID sensor input the ID sensor correction coefficient with SP3...

Page 474: ...connected connector of image transfer belt contact sensor or motor Disconnected cable 442 D 1 Replace the image transfer belt contact sensor 2 Replace the image transfer belt contact motor No Type Det...

Page 475: ...between the paper transfer unit and PSU 2 Replace the paper transfer unit contact sensor 3 Replace the paper transfer unit contact motor 4 Replace the 24V fuse on the PSU 5 Replace the IOB No Type De...

Page 476: ...1 Check or replace the harness 2 Replace the toner transport motor 3 Replace the 24V fuse on the PSU 4 Replace the interlock switch No Type Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures Hi...

Page 477: ...ply unit 492 C 1 Check or replace the harness 2 Replace the image transfer belt unit or paper transfer unit 3 Replace the high voltage supply unit No Type Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshootin...

Page 478: ...motor rotates clockwise if the upper limit is not detected within 1 5 seconds the machine asks the user to reset the tray If one of these conditions occurs three consecutive times the SC is generated...

Page 479: ...when the tray lift motor is turned on to lift or lower the tray For the paper feed unit Defective tray lift motor or connector disconnection Defective lift sensor or connector disconnection For the L...

Page 480: ...position home position sensor ON the tray lift motor stops If the upper limit does not go off for 1 5 seconds even the tray lift motor turns on to lower the tray after the upper limit has been detect...

Page 481: ...lift sensor or connector disconnection 504 01 B 1 Check the cable connections 2 Check and or replace the defective component No Type Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures Tray 4 e...

Page 482: ...sensor of the LCT 1200 sheet does not go on after the pick up roller solenoid has turned on at power on Tray lift motor defective or disconnected Tray lift sensor defective or disconnected 1 1 Check...

Page 483: ...ctor disconnection Defective IOB 530 D Check the connector and or replace the fusing fan motor No Type Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures Ventilation fan at the left side of the...

Page 484: ...oil fan motor Defective IOB 532 D 1 Check or replace the harness 2 Replace the IH coil fan 3 Replace the IOB No Type Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures IH inverter fan error The...

Page 485: ...fan motor Defective second duct motor Defective IOB 534 D 1 Check or replace the harness 2 Replace the second duct fan 3 Replace the IOB No Type Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedu...

Page 486: ...troller fan motor Disconnected or defective harness Defective IOB 536 D 1 Replace the controller fan motor 2 Check or replace the harness 3 Replace the IOB No Type Details Symptom Possible Cause Troub...

Page 487: ...Heating roller thermopile error The temperature measured by the heating roller thermopile does not reach 0 C for 6 seconds Loose connection of the heating roller thermopile Defective heating roller th...

Page 488: ...ch 100 C for 15 seconds after the heating lamp on The heating roller temperature does not reach the ready temperature while 60 seconds after the heating lamp on The center temperature of the heating r...

Page 489: ...IOB Defective BICU Related SC code SC 553 543 A 1 Replace the PSU 2 Replace the IOB 3 Replace the BICU No Type Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures Heating roller fusing lamp ove...

Page 490: ...onds Broken heating roller thermistor Related SC code SC 555 545 A Replace the heating roller thermistor No Type Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures Pressure roller lamp consecut...

Page 491: ...etections This error is defined when the detected zero cross signal is less than 45 Defective fusing lamp relay Defective fusing lamp relay circuit Unstable power supply 547 D 1 Check the power supply...

Page 492: ...er fusing lamp broken Related SC code SC 542 552 A 1 Check if the pressure roller thermistor is firmly connected 2 Replace the pressure roller fusing lamp No Type Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubl...

Page 493: ...fusing control system 554 A 1 Replace the pressure roller thermistor 2 Replace the PSU 3 Replace the IOB 4 Replace the BICU No Type Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures Pressure...

Page 494: ...r for the fusing unit reaches 3 times The paper jam counter is cleared if the paper is fed correctly This SC is activated only when SP1159 001 is set to 1 default 0 Paper jam in the fusing unit 559 A...

Page 495: ...1 second Defective PSU Defective IOB Defective BICU 563 A 1 Replace the thermistor 2 Replace the PSU 3 Replace the IOB 4 Replace the BICU No Type Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedu...

Page 496: ...hooting Procedures Heating lamp consecutive full power 3 When the fusing unit is not running in the ready condition the pressure roller fusing lamp keeps ON full power for 120 seconds or more Broken h...

Page 497: ...rror when SP5987 001 is set to 1 Disconnected mechanical counter Defective mechanical counter Check or replace the mechanical counter No Type Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures...

Page 498: ...fter sending a command to it The IOB resends the command The IOB does not receive an OK signal after sending the command 3 times Cable problems IOB problems BICU problems PSU problems in the machine M...

Page 499: ...al counter device No Type Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures Counter device error 2 After 3 attempts to send a data frame to the optional counter device via the serial communica...

Page 500: ...Card Error Expanded authentication module error There is no expanded authentication module in the machine The SD card or the file of the expanded authentication module is broken There is no DESS modul...

Page 501: ...rd and BICU 2 Replace the controller board 3 Replace the BICU No Type Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures 650 CTL B Communication error of the remote service modem Cumin M Authen...

Page 502: ...Procedures Incorrect dial up connection 001 Program parameter error 002 Program execution error An unexpected error occurs when the modem Cumin M tries to call the center with a dial up connection Cau...

Page 503: ...type of engine board and controller board 671 CTL D 1 Replace the BICU 2 Replace the controller board No Type Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures Controller to operation panel co...

Page 504: ...s harness and replace it if it is damaged Replace the RFID controller board Replace the BCU board 061 064 D RFID Communication error due to the following Defective RFID reader and writer Defective RFI...

Page 505: ...r the SC If this happens the cause is probably a board or harness defect which affects all four colors In such cases Check the physical condition of the harness that connects RFID controller board and...

Page 506: ...e not been installed in the machine Caused by noise Turn the main power switch off and on No Type Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures 687 D Memory address command error The BICU...

Page 507: ...he main switch off and on 2 Check the cable connection 3 Replace the laser optics housing unit 4 Replace the BICU board 3 1 8 SC7XX PERIPHERALS No Type Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting P...

Page 508: ...uide plate position sensor and or guide plate motor 4 Replace the finisher main board No Type Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures 730 B Finisher Tray 1 shift motor error The shif...

Page 509: ...motor does not switch off within the prescribed time after operating The HP sensor of the staple unit does not detect the home position after the staple unit moves to its home position The HP sensor...

Page 510: ...or turned on first detection jam error consecutive twice detection SC code Motor overload Loose connection of the stapler home position sensor Loose connection of the stapler movement motor Defective...

Page 511: ...motor has turned on Motor overload Loose connection of the stack feed motor Defective stack feed motor 746 B 1 Check the connections and cables for the stack feed motor and HP sensor 2 Check for bloc...

Page 512: ...mechanism 3 Replace the punch HP sensor and or punch motor 4 Replace the finisher main board No Type Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures Finisher folder plate motor error The fo...

Page 513: ...ve Defective motor 763 B 1 Check the connections to the punch movement motor 2 Defective punch movement motor No Type Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures Paper position sensor sl...

Page 514: ...r 765 B 1 Check the connections to the paper position sensor slide motor 2 Defective paper position sensor slide motor No Type Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures Paper position...

Page 515: ...peration Defective shift motor Defective shift motor HP sensor 770 B 1 Check the connections to the shift motor and the shift motor HP sensor 2 Defective shift motor or the shift motor HP sensor No Ty...

Page 516: ...t installation 792 B 1 Check the connections between the finisher and the machine 2 Install a new finisher No Type Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures Upper limit switch error Th...

Page 517: ...r motor 798 2 B 1 Check or replace the harness 2 Check for blockages in the jogger motor mechanism 3 Replace the jogger HP sensor 4 Replace the jogger motor 5 Replace the finisher main board No Type D...

Page 518: ...s not turn off for a certain time after the stack feed out belt has moved from its home position The 1st detection failure causes a jam error and the 2nd failure causes this SC code Defective stack fe...

Page 519: ...certain time when the positioning roller returns to its home position from the lower position The 1st detection failure causes a jam error and the 2nd failure causes this SC code Disconnected or defec...

Page 520: ...sheet finisher The stapler HP sensor does not detect ON OFF signal even the stapler moves from the OFF ON position for 0 6 seconds The stapler HP sensor does not detect ON when a stapling job is comma...

Page 521: ...nnection of the stapler home position sensor Loose connection of the stapler movement motor Defective stapler home position sensor Defective stapler movement motor 798 7 B 1 Check the connection of th...

Page 522: ...stack pressure solenoid in the finisher is not operating Solenoid harness loose broken Solenoid obstructed Stack height sensor dirty harness loose broke Solenoid defective Stack height sensor defectiv...

Page 523: ...ve 816 CTL D Replace the controller board No Type Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures Fatal kernel error 819 CTL C Due to a control error a RAM overflow occurred during system pr...

Page 524: ...e Troubleshooting Procedures 821 D 0B00 ASIC error The write verify check error has occurred in the ASIC Defective ASIC device Replace the controller board D 0B06 ASIC detection error The I O ASIC for...

Page 525: ...ge device ASIC register error 1 The CPU detects the video bridge device but detects error data from the video bridge device Defective I F between the video bridge device and controller No Type Details...

Page 526: ...the check sum stored in ROM 6104 PHY IC error The PHY IC on the controller cannot be correctly recognized 6105 PHY IC loop back error An error occurred during the loop back test for the PHY IC on the...

Page 527: ...al NVRAM 1501 The one second counted by the RTC is different from the one second counted by the CPU on the controller Defective the RTC device D 15FF The RTC device is not detected Defective the RTC d...

Page 528: ...Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures 829 D Self diagnostic error Optional RAM 0301 Verification error Error detected during a write verify check for the optional RAM SDRAM DIMM Lo...

Page 529: ...Mandolin for system control could not be detected After the PCI configuration the device ID for the ASIC could not be checked Replace the VBCU 0F41 ASIC Mandolin for system control could not be detect...

Page 530: ...Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures 853 CTL B Wireless LAN card not detected The wireless LAN card is not detected before communication is established though the wireless LAN board is detected...

Page 531: ...in the wireless LAN Bluetooth card Loose connection Defective wireless LAN Bluetooth card 1 Check the connection 2 Replace the wireless LAN Bluetooth card No Type Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubl...

Page 532: ...ontroller board 1 Encryption key setting for HDD error The controller fails to copy a new encryption key to the HDD Defective SATA chip on the controller board 1 Replace the controller board 2 NVRAM d...

Page 533: ...tion unit 8 HDD check error The HDD is not correctly installed No HDD installed Unformatted HDD The encryption key on the controller is different from the one on the HDD 1 Install the HDD correctly 1...

Page 534: ...format the HDD 2 Replace the HDD No Type Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures 861 CTL D HDD Reboot error The HDD does not become ready within 30 seconds after the power is supplie...

Page 535: ...ontroller 1 Replace the HDD 2 Replace the controller No Type Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures 864 CTL D HDD CRC error While reading data from the HDD or storing data in the HD...

Page 536: ...CTL D SD card error The SD card is ejected from the slot 1 Install the SD card 2 Turn the main switch off and on No Type Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures 868 CTL D SD card acc...

Page 537: ...ective HDD Incorrect path to the server 1 Initialize the address book data SP5 846 050 2 Initialize the user information SP5 832 006 3 Replace the HDD No Type Details Symptom Possible Cause Troublesho...

Page 538: ...All error 1 HDD An error is detected while all of the HDD or NVRAM are formatted physically by the Data Overwrite Security Unit D377 Data Overwrite Security Unit SD card not installed Defective HDD 1...

Page 539: ...2 004 002 Log Data Error 2 An encryption module not installed 1 Disable the log encryption setting with SP9730 004 0 is off 2 Install the DESS module 003 Log Data Error 3 Invalid log encryption key du...

Page 540: ...executed but the Data Overwrite Security Unit D377 is installed and activated Defective SD card D377 SD card D377 not installed 1 Replace the NVRAM and then install the new SD card D377 2 Check and re...

Page 541: ...vice Call Conditions No Type Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures 880 CTL D File format converter error The file format converter does not respond Defective file format converter...

Page 542: ...tween the NVRAM and controller 2 Replace the NVRAM 3 Replace the controller No Type Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures 910 CTL D External Controller Error 1 911 External Control...

Page 543: ...ted Connection to EFI controller loose No Type Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures 920 CTL D Printer application error An error is detected in the printer application program Def...

Page 544: ...able No Type Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures 991 CTL C Software continuity error The software has attempted to perform an unexpected operation However unlike SC 990 the objec...

Page 545: ...fere with operation of the machine No Type Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures 995 D CPM setting error 001 Defective BICU NVRAM Replacement error 1 Install the previous NVRAM 2 I...

Page 546: ...k that application programs are correctly configured 3 For a fax operation problem simplify the nesting of the fax group addresses 4 Take necessary countermeasures specific to the application program...

Page 547: ...ist Please understand that it may take some time to get a reply on how to solve the problem because in some cases the design staff in Japan must analyze the data Symptom Possible Causes Action taken S...

Page 548: ......

Page 549: ...APPENDIX PROCESS CONTROL ERROR CONDITIONS APPENDIX 4 PROCESS CONTROL ERROR CONDITIONS REVISION HISTORY Page Date Added Updated New None...

Page 550: ......

Page 551: ...n Developer initialization was forcibly terminated A cover was opened or the main switch was turned off during the initialization 1 Do the developer initialization again when done in SP mode Reinstall...

Page 552: ...removed 2 Defective TD sensor 9 Vcnt error 3 Vcnt is less than 4 7V 1 Make sure that the heat seal on the development unit is not removed 2 Defective TD sensor 3 Vt target settings are not correct 4...

Page 553: ...his table 41 Vt error Vt maximum or minimum error is detected Defective development unit Vt maximum error and an image is faint 1 Replace the toner supply pump unit Vt maximum error and an image is O...

Page 554: ...e as 53 56 Gamma error Minimum Gamma is out of range Gamma 0 15 ID sensor pattern density is too low Hardware defective 1 Same as 53 2 Replace the toner supply pump unit 57 Vk error Maximum Vk is out...

Page 555: ...fer belt Scratched image transfer belt Defective ID sensor Poor connection Defective IOB 1 Clean the ID sensor 2 Check the belt cleaning Clean or replace the transfer belt 3 Replace the image transfer...

Page 556: ...nt has correctly been done 2 Cannot detect patterns ID sensors have not detected the patterns for line position adjustment See Note 3 Fewer lines on the pattern than the target The patterns which ID s...

Page 557: ...Appendix Troubleshooting Guide APPENDIX 5 TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE REVISION HISTORY Page Date Added Updated New None...

Page 558: ......

Page 559: ...5 1 D023 D025 Appendix Trouble shooting Guide 5 APPENDIX TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE 5 1 TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE 5 1 1 IMAGE QUALITY The following work flow shows the basic troubleshooting steps for the image...

Page 560: ...Troubleshooting Guide D023 D025 5 2 SM Appendix...

Page 561: ...4 Use SP2 194 007 to check if the result of the line position adjustment is correct 0 Completed successfully 1 Not completed If the result is 1 refer to Countermeasure list for color registration err...

Page 562: ...e shutter motor 2 Replace the high voltage power supply unit 3 Do the forced process control SP3 011 001 or supply some toner SP3 015 xxx 4 Replace the BICU Normal image but with color registration er...

Page 563: ...age transfer belt 2 Replace the drum motor 3 Replace the BICU The main scan registration is shifted by more than 0 66 mm but only at the central area of the image on the output Defective ID sensor at...

Page 564: ...w density Defective laser optics housing unit shutter Defective image processing unit Low density of test pattern Defective BICU 1 Replace the shutter motor 2 Replace the high voltage power supply uni...

Page 565: ...1 4mm from the sub scan registration of K No defective component Defective image transfer belt Defective drive units Defective BICU 1 Do SP2 111 003 again 2 Replace the image transfer belt 3 Replace...

Page 566: ...t 0 in SP2 194 007 Result No color registration errors in SP2 194 010 011 012 Test pattern check Possible cause Countermeasure The main scan registration of K is shifted Abnormal SP setting value of m...

Page 567: ...1 Replace the ID sensor 2 Replace the image transfer belt 3 Replace the BICU The main scan registrations of M C Y are shifted Defective laser optics housing unit Defective ID sensor Defective BICU In...

Page 568: ...IOB 1 Reinstall or replace the PCU 2 Replace the laser optics housing unit 3 Replace the IOB The sub scan lines are shifted Shifted lines appear cyclically Defective PCU Defective drive unit Drum pha...

Page 569: ...Appendix Jam Detection APPENDIX 6 JAM DETECTION REVISION HISTORY Page Date Added Updated New None...

Page 570: ......

Page 571: ...on 6 APPENDIX JAM DETECTION 6 1 JAM DETECTION 6 1 1 PAPER JAM DISPLAY SP7 507 shows the paper jam history CODE Indicates the jam code SIZE Indicates the paper Size Code TOTAL Indicates the total count...

Page 572: ...m tray 4 Y 7504 7 LCT ON Paper is not fed from LCT U 7504 8 Bypass ON Paper is not fed from the by pass tray A 7504 9 Duplex ON Paper is jammed at the duplex unit Z 7504 10 7504 11 Vertical Transport...

Page 573: ...paper D 7504 22 Relay Transport ON Relay sensor bridge unit does not detect paper D 7504 23 7504 24 Junction Gate Feed ON Junction gate jam sensor does not detect paper C 7504 25 Duplex Exit ON Duplex...

Page 574: ...es not turn off U 7504 59 7504 60 Exit Sensor Paper exit sensor does not turn off C 7504 61 Relay Exit Sensor Tray exit sensor bridge unit does not turn off D 7504 62 Relay Sensor Relay sensor bridge...

Page 575: ...102 Finisher Staple B408 Paper does not reach to the staple tray entrance sensor or stay at the staple tray entrance sensor R3 R5 7504 103 Finisher Exit B408 Lower tray exit sensor does not detect pap...

Page 576: ...er has moved from its home position Shift roller HP sensor does not turn on after the shift roller has returned to its home position R1 R2 7504 108 Finisher Staple Motor B408 Stapler HP sensor does no...

Page 577: ...nisher Shift Tray Exit EUP B804 B805 Paper does not reach the upper tray exit sensor or stays at the upper tray exit sensor R1 R4 7504 194 Finisher Stapler Exit EUP B804 B805 Stapling tray paper senso...

Page 578: ...r tray has lifted up Upper tray limit sensor does not turn off after the upper tray has moved down R1 R4 7504 200 Finisher Jogger Motor EUP B804 B805 Jogger fence HP sensor does not turn on off after...

Page 579: ...EUP B804 B805 Corner stapler does not finish stapling after a specified time Booklet stapler does not finish stapling after a specified time R8 R12 7504 204 Finisher Folder Motor EUP B804 only Fold p...

Page 580: ...ovement HP sensor does not turn on off after the punch movement motor has turned on Paper position slide HP sensor does not turn on off after the paper position sensor slide motor has turned on R1 R4...

Page 581: ...Jam Detection SM Appendix 6 11 D023 D025 Appendix Jam Detection Sensor Locations...

Page 582: ......

Page 583: ...Appendix Electrical Component Defects APPENDIX 7 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DEFECTS REVISION HISTORY Page Date Added Updated New None...

Page 584: ......

Page 585: ...DEFECTS 7 1 1 SENSORS The CN numbers in the following table are the connector numbers on the IOB No Sensor Name Sensor Board Name Active CN Condition Symptom Open Open Cover is displayed SW1 Right Do...

Page 586: ...Shorted SC258 ID Sensor Center and K A CN211 2 Open Shorted SC400 SC258 S1 ID Sensor Rear A CN211 3 Open Shorted SC258 Open Jam A Jam8 17 S13 Registration Sensor L CN224 A2 Shorted Jam A B Jam1 S29 Dr...

Page 587: ...fer Belt Rotation Sensor H L CN208 11 Open Shorted SC443 Open Jam A Jam3 11 S20 Vertical Transport Sensor 1 L CN230 A7 Shorted Jam A B Jam1 Open Paper end is not detected when there is no paper in the...

Page 588: ...detected when tray 1 is not set S12 By pass Paper Size Sensor L CN232 B16 B17 B19 B20 Open Shorted Paper size error Open Paper on the by pass tray is not detected when paper is set SW2 By pass Paper...

Page 589: ...nsor K A CN227 A7 Open Shorted SC372 S34 TD Sensor M A CN227 A15 Open Shorted SC373 S35 TD Sensor C A CN227 B7 Open Shorted SC374 S36 TD Sensor Y A CN227 B15 Open Shorted SC375 Open Jam C Jam 19 S4 Fu...

Page 590: ...bottle is not set SW6 Tray 2 Paper Size Switch L CN224 A11 A12 A13 A15 Open Shorted Paper size error S6 Temperature Humidity Sensor A CN231 25 27 Open Shorted SC498 Printed image has some problems su...

Page 591: ...tion does not remain S41 Original Width Sensor 1 A CN313 14 SIO Open Shorted Original paper size cannot be detected Sxx Original Width Sensor 2 A CN313 11 SIO Open Shorted Original paper size cannot b...

Page 592: ...Condition Symptom S40 Platen Cover Sensor L CN318 5 SIO Open Shorted Platen cover open cannot be detected Paper Transfer Contact Sensor L CN208 7 Open Shorted SC452 Image Transfer Belt Contact Sensor...

Page 593: ...250V 1A 250V 5V power to the SIO and heater is not supplied FU5 5A 250V 5A 250V 5V power to the IOB not supplied FU6 2A 250V 2A 125V 5VS power to the BICU not supplied FU7 10A 125V 10A 125V 24VS powe...

Page 594: ...ning on the main switch FU1 15A 125V 8A 250V 15V power to the IH coil unit is not supplied SC689 occurs FU2 115 C No response FU3 115 C No response FU4 1A 250V 15V power to the IH coil unit is not sup...

Page 595: ...P MODE TABLES REVISION HISTORY Page Date Added Updated New 229 10 28 2009 SP5193 updated 237 238 04 16 2009 System Service Mode 293 05 13 2009 SP5 887 294 10 28 2009 SP5895 added 295 09 17 2009 SP5985...

Page 596: ......

Page 597: ...ode Paper Type Plain Thick 1or Thick 2 1001 Adjusts the leading edge registration by changing the registration motor operation timing for each mode 002 Tray Plain ENG 003 Tray Middle Thick ENG 004 Tra...

Page 598: ...023 Duplex Plain 1200 ENG 024 Duplex Middle Thick 1200 ENG 025 Duplex Thick 1 1200 ENG Side to Side Reg Side to Side Registration Adjustment 1002 Adjusts the side to side registration by changing the...

Page 599: ...ray2 3 4 5 LCT Plain ENG 9 to 5 2 1 mm step 008 Tray 2 3 4 5 LCT Middle Thick ENG 9 to 5 1 1 mm step 009 Paper Tray2 3 4 5 LCT Thick 1 ENG 9 to 5 2 1 mm step 012 By pass Plain ENG 013 By pass Middle T...

Page 600: ...5 0 1 mm step 032 Duplex Thick 1 1200 ENG 9 to 5 2 1 mm step 1007 By Pass Size Detection By Pass Size Detection Display LG ENG 0 or 1 0 1 0 Disable 1 Enable 001 Enables or disables the automatic pape...

Page 601: ...environment 0 to 60 0 1 sec step Each environment is determined with SP1112 001 and 002 017 Extra Idling Time H ENG 018 Extra Idling Time M ENG 0 to 60 0 1 sec step 019 Pressure TempThreshold ENG 0 t...

Page 602: ...step 041 F 1bin Paper Feed Pressure Temp ENG 0 to 100 75 1 deg step 1105 Fusing Temperature Fusing Temperature Adjustment Printing Mode Roller Type Color Simplex Duplex Roller Type Center and Ends He...

Page 603: ...ENG 105 to 135 120 1 deg step 012 Sets the pressure roller offset temperature This value is one of the thresholds to determine if the machine is at the heating roller target temperature during warm u...

Page 604: ...0 1 deg step 038 Thin FC Simplex ENG 039 Thin FC Simplex Ends ENG 042 Thin BW Simplex ENG 043 Thin BW Simplex Ends ENG 044 Thin BW Duplex ENG 130 to 175 145 1 deg step 046 Thick 1 FC Simplex ENG 047 T...

Page 605: ...063 Special 1 BW Simplex Ends ENG 064 Special 1 BW Duplex ENG 065 Special 1 BW Duplex Ends ENG 066 Special 2 FC Simplex ENG 067 Special 2 FC Simplex Ends ENG 068 Special 2 FC Duplex ENG 069 Special 2...

Page 606: ...0 1 deg step 083 Specifies the target temperature for the print mode without printing copying job after the machine s recovery 087 Thick 2 FC Simplex Ends ENG 088 Thick 2 BW Simplex Ends ENG 130 to 18...

Page 607: ...55 1 deg step 128 F Plain1 FC Simplex ENG 129 F Plain1 FC Simplex Ends ENG 130 F Plain1 BW Simplex ENG 131 F Plain1 BW Simplex Ends ENG 120 to 160 135 1 deg step 132 F Plain2 FC Simplex ENG 133 F Plai...

Page 608: ...n Plain ENG 151 F 1bin Plain Ends ENG 100 to 160 125 1 deg step Fusing Temperature Display Fusing Temperature Display Heating or Pressure 1106 Displays the current temperature of the heating and press...

Page 609: ...fusing rotation time before executing SP1109 001 Stop Time ENG 5 to 30 10 1 sec step 003 Specifies the time for measuring the nip 1112 Environmental Correction Fusing Temp Threshold Low ENG 10 to 23...

Page 610: ...Low Temp Correction Paper Feed ENG 0 to 15 6 5 0 1 deg step 006 High Temp Correction Paper Feed ENG 0 to 15 5 1 deg step 1113 Stand by Time 001 After Ready ENG 0 to 60 20 1 sec step After Recovery EN...

Page 611: ...ction Center Temp 1 226 ENG 10 10 5 1 deg step 010 Specifies the temperature correction for the heating roller center when the paper width is 226 mm or more The start time of this SP can be adjusted w...

Page 612: ...nds when the paper width is less than 226 mm The start time of this SP can be adjusted with SP1116 020 Center Temp 4 226 ENG 10 to 10 0 1 deg step 016 Specifies the temperature correction for the heat...

Page 613: ...s passed after feeding the paper Control Time 4 226 ENG 0 to 250 0 1 sec step 021 Specifies the start time of the temperature correction that is set with SP1116 016 and 017 The temperature correction...

Page 614: ...tep DFU 001 Specifies the idling time without the lamp on after reaching the ready temperature After Job End ENG 0 to 4 0 1 sec step 002 Specifies the idling time without the lamp on after job end Thi...

Page 615: ...HM Fusing ENG 15 to 0 5 1 deg 011 Pattern 2 HM Pressure ENG 0 to 60 0 1 deg 1119 FF Duty 001 Plain Center ENG 002 Plain Ends ENG 0 to 100 60 1 003 Thin Center ENG 004 Thin Ends ENG 0 to 100 50 1 005 T...

Page 616: ...s ENG 0 to 100 40 1 021 Correction Environmental Correction Low ENG 100 to 100 10 1 022 Correction Environmental Correction High ENG 023 Initial Correction Center ENG 024 Initial Correction Ends ENG 1...

Page 617: ...e Timer BW Half ENG 0 to 10000 500 1mm sec FF Correction Time 032 Error Correction Full ENG 033 Error Correction Half ENG 5000 to 5000 0 1mm sec 1120 Continues Print Mode Switch Paper Feed Condition E...

Page 618: ...009 Registration Thick 3 Low ENG 2 to 2 0 4 0 1 step 010 Duplex CW Plane Low ENG 011 Duplex CW Normal High ENG 012 Duplex CW Middle Thick Low ENG 014 Duplex CW Middle Thick High ENG 015 Duplex CW Thi...

Page 619: ...Feed Thick 2 Low ENG 042 Feed Thick 3 Low ENG 2 to 2 0 4 0 1 step 043 Bridge Motor Low ENG 044 Bridge Motor Mid ENG 045 Bridge Motor High ENG 4 to 4 0 0 1 step 060 KOpcDevMot High ENG 062 KOpcDevMot L...

Page 620: ...p 079 Fusing Exit Motor 1200 ENG 4 to 4 0 2 0 01 step 100 Drum Adjust ENG 0 or 1 1 1 101 230mm s M ENG 102 230mm s C ENG 103 230mm s Y ENG 7 to 7 0 1 step step 104 205mm s M ENG 105 205mm s C ENG 106...

Page 621: ...ult of drum phase adjustment 0 Successfully done 2 Sampling failure 3 Insufficient detection number 003 Auto Execution ENG 0 or 1 1 1 Turns the automatic drum phase adjustment on or off 0 Off 1 On 190...

Page 622: ...005 Inverter Stop Position ENG 006 Reverse Stop Position ENG 007 Re Feed Stop Position ENG 10 to 10 0 1 mm step 008 By pass Solenoid OFF ENG 0 to 40 0 1 mm step 009 By pass Solenoid Re ON ENG 0 or 1...

Page 623: ...Bin Junction Gate Sol ON ENG 013 1 Bin Junction Gate Sol OFF ENG 015 Junction Gate SOL1 ON Plain ENG 016 Junction Gate SOL1 ON Thick ENG 017 Junction Gate SOL1 OFF Plain ENG 018 Junction Gate SOL1 OFF...

Page 624: ...effect while process control mode SP3 041 1 Default ON is activated When deactivating process control mode with SP3 041 1 the values in these SP modes are used for printing 001 Plain Bk ENG 002 Plain...

Page 625: ...in the various print modes Charge bias AC component is adjusted by environment correction SP2 007 xxx to SP2 011 xxx These SPs are activated only when SP2 012 1 is set to 1 manual control 001 Plain B...

Page 626: ...ENG 002 Environmental Target M ENG 003 Environmental Target C ENG 004 Environmental Target Y ENG 0 to 3000 1400 10 A step Charge AC Current ML Charge Roller AC Current Adjustment for MM Color 2008 Dis...

Page 627: ...ntal Target Bk ENG 002 Environmental Target M ENG 003 Environmental Target C ENG 004 Environmental Target Y ENG 0 to 3000 1700 10 A step Charge AC Current MH Charge Roller AC Current Adjustment for MH...

Page 628: ...nmental Target C ENG 004 Environmental Target Y ENG 0 to 3000 1180 10 A step 2012 Charge Output Control 001 AC Voltage ENG Selects the AC voltage control type 0 or 1 0 1 step 0 Process control 1 Manua...

Page 629: ...anges the humidity threshold between ML and MM 0 to 100 11 3 0 01 g m3 step 005 Absolute Humidity Threshold 3 ENG Changes the humidity threshold between MM and MH 0 to 100 18 0 0 01 g m3 step 006 Abso...

Page 630: ...tep 013 Previous Absolute Humidity Display ENG Displays the previous absolute humidity 0 to 100 0 0 01 g m3 step 2014 Charge AC Control Setting 001 Exec Interval Power ON ENG 002 Exec Interval Print E...

Page 631: ...re the parameters for the automatic line position adjustment and are adjusted at the factory However you must input a value for SP2101 001 after replacing the laser optics housing unit For details see...

Page 632: ...m Speed M ENG 006 Main Mag Low Speed M ENG 007 Main Mag High Speed C ENG 008 Main Mag Medium Speed C ENG 009 Main Mag Low Speed C ENG 010 Main Mag High Speed Y ENG 011 Main Mag Medium Speed Y ENG 012...

Page 633: ...idth Thin ENG 0 to 9 9 5 0 1 mm step 006 Duplex Trail L Size ENG 0 to 4 1 0 1 mm step 007 Duplex Trail M Size ENG 0 to 4 0 8 0 1 mm step 008 Duplex Trail S Size ENG 0 to 4 0 0 1 mm step 009 Duplex Lef...

Page 634: ...Speed M ENG 003 High Speed C ENG 004 High Speed Y ENG 005 Middle Speed Bk ENG 006 Middle Speed M ENG 007 Middle Speed C ENG 008 Middle Speed Y ENG 009 Low Speed Bk ENG 010 Low Speed M ENG 011 Low Spe...

Page 635: ...System Service Mode SM Appendix 8 39 D023 D025 Appendix SP Mode Tables Image Parameter 2107 DFU 001 Image Gamma Flag ENG 002 Shading Correction Flag ENG 0 or 1 1 1 step...

Page 636: ...pattern Horizontal 5 1 dot grid pattern Vertical 6 1 dot grid pattern Horizontal 7 1 dot grid pattern Fine 8 1 dot grid pattern Rough 9 1 dot slant pattern Fine 10 1 dot slant pattern Rough 11 1 dot...

Page 637: ...density 15 Darkest density 2111 Forced Line Position Adj 001 Mode a Executes the fine line position adjustment twice If this SP is not completed NG is displayed do SP2111 003 first and then try this S...

Page 638: ...ics housing unit is installed or when SC285 occurs For details see Laser Optics Housing Unit in the Replacement and Adjustment section 001 Pulse M ENG 002 Pulse C ENG 003 Pulse Y ENG 100 to 100 0 1 pu...

Page 639: ...ep Thick Paper Skew Adj 2120 Selects the skew adjustment value for thick paper 001 On Off ENG 0 or 1 1 1 step 0 Off 1 On ID Sensor Check Result DFU 2140 Displays the results of the ID sensor check Bk...

Page 640: ...ENG 002 M ENG 003 C ENG 004 Y ENG 005 Front ENG 006 Center ENG 007 Rear ENG 0 to 5 5 0 0 01V step ID Sensor Check Result DFU 2142 Displays the maximum result values of the ID sensor check Bk M C Y ID...

Page 641: ...ENG 003 Minimum C ENG 004 Minimum Y ENG 005 Minimum Front ENG 006 Minimum Center ENG 007 Minimum Rear ENG 0 to 5 5 0 0 01V step ID Sensor Check Result DFU 2144 Displays the maximum result 2 values of...

Page 642: ...of the ID sensor check Bk M C Y ID sensors for the process control Front Center Rear ID sensors for the automatic line position adjustment 001 Minimum 2 Bk ENG 002 Minimum 2 M ENG 003 Minimum 2 C ENG...

Page 643: ...e right side of the image Decreasing a value makes the image shift to the left side on the print Increasing a value makes the image shift to the right side on the print 1 pulse 1 16 dot 027 Area0 Bk E...

Page 644: ...justs the area magnification for LD 1 256 to 255 0 1 sub dot step 049 Area9 Bk ENG 050 Area10 Bk ENG 051 Area11 Bk ENG 052 Area12 Bk ENG 079 Area0 M ENG Not used 080 Area1 M ENG Adjusts the area magni...

Page 645: ...M ENG 092 Area0 Bk ENG Not used 093 Area1 Bk ENG 094 Area2 Bk ENG 095 Area3 Bk ENG 096 Area4 Bk ENG 097 Area5 Bk ENG 098 Area6 Bk ENG 099 Area7 Bk ENG 100 Area8 Bk ENG Adjusts the area magnification f...

Page 646: ...ea8 C ENG Adjusts the area magnification for LD 0 256 to 255 0 1 sub dot step 140 Area9 C ENG 141 Area10 C ENG 142 Area11 C ENG 143 Area12 C ENG 144 Area0 C ENG Not used 145 Area1 C ENG 146 Area2 C EN...

Page 647: ...Area12 C ENG 183 Area0 Y ENG Not used 184 Area1 Y ENG 185 Area2 Y ENG 186 Area3 Y ENG 187 Area4 Y ENG 188 Area5 Y ENG 189 Area6 Y ENG 190 Area7 Y ENG 191 Area8 Y ENG Adjusts the area magnification for...

Page 648: ...ENG 198 Area2 Y ENG 199 Area3 Y ENG 200 Area4 Y ENG 201 Area5 Y ENG 202 Area6 Y ENG 203 Area7 Y ENG 204 Area8 Y ENG Adjusts the area magnification for LD 1 256 to 255 0 1 sub dot step 205 Area9 Y ENG...

Page 649: ...t the front side of the machine right side of the image For Cyan and Yellow area 1 is at the front side of the machine right side of the image and area 14 is at the rear side of the machine left side...

Page 650: ...35 Area 2 M ENG 036 Area 3 M ENG 037 Area 4 M ENG 038 Area 5 M ENG 039 Area 6 M ENG 040 Area 7 M ENG 041 Area 8 M ENG 042 Area 9 M ENG 043 Area 10 M ENG 044 Area 11 M ENG 045 Area 12 M ENG 046 Area 13...

Page 651: ...rea 5 C ENG 071 Area 6 C ENG 072 Area 7 C ENG 073 Area 8 C ENG 074 Area 9 C ENG 075 Area 10 C ENG 076 Area 11 C ENG 077 Area 12 C ENG 078 Area 13 C ENG 079 Area 14 C ENG 50 to 150 100 1 step 080 Area...

Page 652: ...G 100 Area 3 Y ENG 101 Area 4 Y ENG 102 Area 5 Y ENG 103 Area 6 Y ENG 104 Area 7 Y ENG 105 Area 8 Y ENG 106 Area 9 Y ENG 107 Area 10 Y ENG 108 Area 11 Y ENG 109 Area 12 Y ENG 110 Area 13 Y ENG 111 Are...

Page 653: ...57 D023 D025 Appendix SP Mode Tables 2160 Vertical Line Width DFU 001 600dpi Bk ENG 002 600dpi Ma ENG 003 600dpi Cy ENG 004 600dpi Ye ENG 005 1200dpi Bk ENG 006 1200dpi Ma ENG 007 1200dpi Cy ENG 008...

Page 654: ...ion correction value M Scan Erro indicates the shift correction value in the main scan direction S Scan Erro Indicates the shift correction value in the sub scan direction M Cor Dot indicates the dot...

Page 655: ...ENG 015 M Left Mag Subdot M ENG 016 M Right Mag Subdot M ENG 32768 to 32767 0 1 pulse step 017 S Cor 600 Line M ENG 16384 to 16383 0 1 line step 018 S Cor 600 Sub M ENG 1 to 1 0 0 001 line step 019 S...

Page 656: ...NG 16384 to 16383 0 1 line step 036 S Cor 600 Sub C ENG 1 to 1 0 0 001 line step 037 S Cor 1200 Line C ENG 16384 to 16383 0 1 line step 038 S Cor 1200 Sub C ENG 1 to 1 0 0 001 line step 039 Skew Y ENG...

Page 657: ...ffset Color M Scan Main scan S Scan Sub scan High 154 mm sec Medium 111 mm sec Low 77 mm sec 001 M Magnification ENG 002 C Magnification ENG 003 Y Magnification ENG Adjusts the line position manually...

Page 658: ...511 0 1 dot step 017 M Scan High Subdot Y ENG 15 to 15 0 1 pulse step 018 M Scan Medium Dot Y ENG 512 to 511 0 1 dot step 019 M Scan Medium Subdot Y ENG 15 to 15 0 1 pulse step 020 M Scan Low Dot Y EN...

Page 659: ...e step 035 S Scan High Subline Y ENG 1 to 1 0 0 001 line 036 S Scan Medium Line Y ENG 16384 to 16383 0 1 line step 037 S Scan Medium Subline Y ENG 1 to 1 0 0 001 line 038 S Scan Low Line Y ENG 16384 t...

Page 660: ...ndix 009 Execute Low C 010 Execute High Y 011 Execute Medium Y 012 Execute Low Y 2184 Main Scan Length Detection Target DFU 001 Execute Bk 002 Execute M 003 Execute C 004 Execute Y Executes the target...

Page 661: ...e Laser Optics Housing Unit in the Replacement Adjustment section It is not necessary to input the values for the other colors these are automatically adjusted after doing the line position adjustment...

Page 662: ...step 005 M Scan Mag Subdot M ENG 006 M Scan Mag Subdot C ENG 007 M Scan Mag Subdot Y ENG DFU 0 or 1 1 1 step 0 Disable correction 1 Enable correction 008 Area Mag Subdot M ENG 009 Area Mag Subdot C E...

Page 663: ...007 ch 0 Filter Rear a2 ENG 131071 to 131071 63398 1 bit step 008 ch 0 Filter Rear b0 ENG 131071 to 131071 84 1 bit step 009 ch 0 Filter Rear b1 ENG 131071 to 131071 168 1 bit step 010 ch 0 Filter Re...

Page 664: ...39 1 bit step 024 ch 2 Filter Front b1 ENG 131071 to 131071 77 1 bit step 025 ch 2 Filter Front b2 ENG 131071 to 131071 39 1 bit step 026 ch 2 Filter Rear a1 ENG 131071 to 131071 128596 1 bit step 027...

Page 665: ...t Threshold Setting DFU ch 0 ID sensor at rear ch 1 ID sensor at center ch 2 ID sensor at front 001 ch 0 1st ENG 002 ch 0 2nd ENG 003 ch 0 3rd ENG 004 ch 0 4th ENG 005 ch 1 1st ENG 006 ch 1 2nd ENG 00...

Page 666: ...stment for color printing mode after job end Page Interrupt BW FC ENG 0 to 999 200 1 page step 004 Adjusts the threshold of the line position adjustment for BW and color printing mode during job Page...

Page 667: ...ep 009 Adjust the time threshold for the line position adjustment Mode b adjustment once The timing for line position adjustment depends on the combinations of several conditions Magnification ENG 0 t...

Page 668: ...minute step 006 Temperature ENG 0 to 100 0 1 deg step 007 Execution Result ENG 0 or 1 0 1 step 0 Completed successfully 1 Failed 008 Number of Execution ENG 0 to 999999 0 1 times step 009 Number of Fa...

Page 669: ...U 001 MUSIC Start Time EDT ENG 10 to 40 20 10ms step 002 TM Sensor Position ENG 50 to 500 105 5 0 1mm step Music A D Interval 2198 ADC Trigger Counter 001 ADC Trigger Counter ENG 7 5 to 20 10 0 1 s st...

Page 670: ...ed only when SP3 041 002 is set to 0 Plain 154 mm sec Thick 1 and Thick 2 Fine 77 mm sec 001 Plain Bk ENG 002 Plain M ENG 003 Plain C ENG 004 Plain Y ENG 005 Thick 1 Bk ENG 008 Thick 1 Y ENG 009 Thick...

Page 671: ...rol SP3 041 001 Default ON is activated After deactivating Process Control with SP3 041 001 the values in these SP modes are used for printing Plain 154 mm sec Thick 1 and Thick 2 Fine 77 mm sec 001 P...

Page 672: ...ing ENG 0 to 6 0 1 step 002 Sets the environment condition manually 0 Automatic environment control 1 LL Low temperature Low humidity 2 ML Middle temperature Low humidity 3 MM Middle temperature Middl...

Page 673: ...lue for the paper size correction 001 Threshold 1 ENG 0 to 350 297 1 mm step Threshold 1 paper Paper is detected as S1 size 002 Threshold 2 ENG 0 to 350 257 1 mm step Threshold 2 paper Threshold 1 Pap...

Page 674: ...A step 2326 Transfer Roller CL Bias Transfer Roller Cleaning Bias Adjustment Positive ENG 0 to 2100 500 100 V step 001 Adjusts the positive voltage of the paper transfer roller for cleaning the paper...

Page 675: ...Transfer Belt Full Color Bias Adjustment Plain 154 mm sec Thick 1 and Thick 2 Fine 77 mm sec Image Transfer Plain Bk ENG 0 to 60 22 1 A 001 Adjusts the current for the image transfer belt for Black i...

Page 676: ...1 M ENG 0 to 60 11 1 A 006 Adjusts the current for the image transfer belt for Magenta in full color mode for thick 1 paper Image Transfer Thick 1 C ENG 0 to 60 12 1 A 007 Adjusts the current for the...

Page 677: ...er Thick 1 ENG 1 to 60 1 1 step 004 Image Transfer Plain Bk ENG 1 to 60 31 1 step 005 Image Transfer Plain M ENG 006 Image Transfer Plain C ENG 007 Image Transfer Plain Y ENG 1 to 60 2 1 step 008 Imag...

Page 678: ...p 003 Separation DC Plain 1st Page ENG 0 to 4000 2000 10 V step 004 Separation DC 1200 2nd side ENG 0 to 4000 3000 10 V step Plain Bias BW 2403 Adjusts the current for the paper transfer roller for pl...

Page 679: ...004 Paper Transfer 1200 2nd side ENG 0 to 250 12 1 A step Plain Paper Size Correction 2411 Adjusts the size correction coefficient for the paper transfer roller current for each paper size SP2403 and...

Page 680: ...ize 210 mm Paper width 010 Paper Transfer Plain 2nd Side S3 ENG 011 Paper Transfer Plain 1st Side S3 ENG 100 to 600 140 5 step 275 mm S3 size 210 mm Paper width 012 Paper Transfer 2nd side 1200 S3 ENG...

Page 681: ...d side 1200 S5 ENG 100 to 600 400 5 step Plain Leading Edge Correction Plain Paper Leading Edge Correction 2421 Adjusts the correction to the paper transfer roller current at the paper leading edge in...

Page 682: ...t at the paper leading edge in each mode SP2401 is multiplied by these SPs values The paper leading edge area can be adjusted with SP2422 005 Separation DC Plain 1st Side ENG 006 Separation DC Plain 2...

Page 683: ...ing edge between the erase margin area and the image area Plain 154 mm sec Fine 77 mm sec 001 Paper Transfer Plain 1st Side ENG 002 Paper Transfer Plain 2nd Side ENG 003 Paper Transfer Plain 1st Side...

Page 684: ...2407 are multiplied by these SP values Plain 154 mm sec Fine 77 mm sec The paper trailing edge area can be adjusted with SP2424 001 Paper Transfer Plain 1st Side ENG 002 Paper Transfer Plain 2nd Side...

Page 685: ...ling edge between the erase margin area and the image area Plain 154 mm sec Fine 77 mm sec 001 Paper Transfer Plain 1st Side ENG 002 Paper Transfer Plain 2nd Side ENG 003 Paper Transfer Plain 1st Side...

Page 686: ...06 Paper Transfer FC 2nd Side ENG 1 to 60 14 1 step 007 Separation DC Plain 1st Page ENG 1 to 60 26 1 step 008 Separation DC 1200 2nd side ENG 1 to 60 32 1 step 009 Paper Transfer 1200 BW 1st Side ENG...

Page 687: ...sec Fine 77 mm sec 001 Paper Transfer Plain 1st Side ENG 0 to 250 22 1 A step 003 Paper Transfer Plain 1st Side ENG 0 to 250 11 1 A step Thin Bias FC 2457 Adjusts the current for the paper transfer r...

Page 688: ...77 mm sec 001 Paper Transfer Plain 1st Side S1 ENG 100 to 600 100 5 step S1 size 297 mm Paper width 005 Paper Transfer Plain 1st Side S2 ENG 100 to 600 120 5 step 297 mm S2 size 275 mm Paper width 009...

Page 689: ...1st Side ENG 0 to 400 100 5 step 2471 Adjusts the correction to the discharge plate current at the paper leading edge in each mode SP2451 is multiplied by these SP values The paper leading edge area c...

Page 690: ...0 to 400 100 5 step 003 Paper Transfer Plain 1st Side ENG 0 to 400 100 5 step 005 Separation DC Plain 1st Side ENG 0 to 400 100 5 step 007 Separation DC Plain 1st Page ENG 0 to 400 100 5 step Thin Sw...

Page 691: ...FC 1st Side ENG 1 to 60 1 1 step 007 Separation DC Plain 1st Side ENG 1 to 60 26 1 step 009 Paper Transfer 1200 BW 1st Side ENG 1 to 60 11 1 step 011 Paper Transfer 1200 FC 1st Side ENG 1 to 60 1 1 st...

Page 692: ...ENG 100 to 600 160 5 step 017 Paper Transfer Glossy 1st Side S5 ENG 100 to 600 180 5 step 2485 Grossy Leading Edge Correction 001 Paper Transfer Grossy 1st Side ENG 10 to 400 100 5 step 005 Separation...

Page 693: ...G 1 to 60 1 1 step Thick 1 Bias 2501 Adjusts the DC voltage of the discharge plate for thick 1 paper Thick 1 and Thick 2 Fine 77 mm sec 001 Separation DC Thick 1 1st Side ENG 002 Separation DC Thick 1...

Page 694: ...ts the current for the paper transfer roller for thick 1 paper in full color mode Thick 1 and Thick 2 Fine 77 mm sec 001 Paper Transfer Thick 1 1st Side ENG 002 Paper Transfer Thick 1 2nd Side ENG 0 t...

Page 695: ...Side S1 ENG 100 to 600 100 5 step S1 size 297 mm Paper width 005 Paper Transfer Thick 1 1st Side S2 ENG 100 to 600 105 5 step 297 mm S2 size 275 mm Paper width 006 Paper Transfer Thick 1 2nd Side S2...

Page 696: ...ansfer Thick 1 2nd Side S5 ENG 100 to 600 220 5 step 148 mm S5 size Paper width 019 Paper Transfer Thick 1 1st Side S5 ENG 100 to 600 180 5 step 148 mm S5 size Paper width Thick 1 Leading Edge Correct...

Page 697: ...djusts the bias voltage switch timing of the paper transfer roller discharge plate at the paper leading edge between the erase margin area and the image area Thick 1 and Thick 2 Fine 77 mm sec 001 Pap...

Page 698: ...h mode SP2502 and SP2507 are multiplied by these SP values Thick 1 and Thick 2 Fine 77 mm sec The paper trailing edge area can be adjusted with SP2524 001 Paper Transfer Thick 1 1st Side ENG 002 Paper...

Page 699: ...Transfer Plain 2nd Side ENG 003 Paper Transfer Thick 1 1st Side ENG 005 Paper Transfer Plain 1st Side ENG 006 Paper Transfer Plain 2nd Side ENG 007 Paper Transfer Thick 1 1st Side ENG 0 to 50 0 2 mm...

Page 700: ...Bias BW 2553 Adjusts the current for the paper transfer roller for thick 2 paper in black and white mode 001 Paper Transfer 1st Side ENG 0 to 250 7 1 A step 002 Paper Transfer 2nd Side ENG 0 to 250 1...

Page 701: ...ze 275 mm Paper width 004 Paper Transfer 2nd Side S2 ENG 100 to 600 160 5 step 297 mm S2 size 275 mm Paper width 005 Paper Transfer 1st Side S3 ENG 100 to 600 110 5 step 275 mm S3 size 210 mm Paper wi...

Page 702: ...571 Adjusts the correction to the discharge plate current at the paper leading edge in each mode SP2551 is multiplied by these SP values The paper leading edge area can be adjusted with SP2572 003 Sep...

Page 703: ...aper Transfer 1st Side ENG 002 Paper Transfer 2nd Side ENG 0 to 400 100 5 step 003 Separation DC 1st Page ENG 0 to 400 100 5 step 004 Separation DC 2nd Page ENG 0 to 400 100 5 step Thick 2 Switch Timi...

Page 704: ...60 11 1 step 005 Paper Transfer FC 1st Side ENG 1 to 60 53 1 step 006 Paper Transfer FC 2nd Side ENG 1 to 60 11 1 step 2601 OHP Bias 001 Separation DC ENG 0 to 40000 1000 10 V step OHP Bias 2601 Adjus...

Page 705: ...r transfer roller current for each paper size SP2603 and SP2608 are multiplied by these SP values 001 Paper Transfer S1 ENG 100 to 600 100 5 step S1 size 297 mm Paper width 002 Paper Transfer S2 ENG 1...

Page 706: ...per leading edge area can be adjusted with SP2622 002 Separation DC ENG 0 to 400 100 5 step OHP Switch Timing Lead Edge 2622 Adjusts the bias voltage switch timing of the paper transfer roller dischar...

Page 707: ...ep 2630 OHP Environment Correction 001 Separation DC ENG 1 to 60 22 1 step 002 Paper Transfer BW ENG 1 to 60 11 1 step 003 Paper Transfer FC ENG 1 to 60 1 1 step Thick 3 Bias 2650 Adjusts the DC volta...

Page 708: ...per size SP2651 and SP2652 are multiplied by these SP values 001 Paper Transfer 1st Side S1 ENG 100 to 600 100 5 step S1 size 297 mm Paper width 002 Paper Transfer 1st Side S2 ENG 100 to 600 100 5 ste...

Page 709: ...3 Leading Edge Correction Thick 3 Paper Leading Edge Correction 2654 Adjusts the correction to the paper transfer roller current at the paper leading edge in each mode SP2651 and SP2652 are multiplied...

Page 710: ...ide ENG 004 Separation DC 2nd Page ENG 0 to 50 0 2 mm step Thick 3 Trailing Edge Correction Thick 3 Paper Trailing Edge Correction 2656 Adjusts the correction to the paper transfer roller current for...

Page 711: ...2nd Page ENG 0 to 50 0 2 mm step Thick 3 Environment Correction Thick 3 Paper MM Environment Coefficient Adjustment 2660 Adjusts the environment coefficient for each mode When the environment is detec...

Page 712: ...ues 003 Paper Transfer Thick 3 2nd Side ENG 10 to 250 110 5 step 004 Separation DC Thick 3 2nd Side ENG 10 to 250 180 5 step Thick 3 HH Thick 3 Paper HH Environment Coefficient Adjustment 2662 Adjusts...

Page 713: ...as BW 2753 Adjusts the current for the paper transfer roller for special paper 1 in black and white mode Plain 154 mm sec Fine 77 mm sec 001 Paper Transfer Plain 1st Side ENG 002 Paper Transfer Plain...

Page 714: ...st Side S2 ENG 006 Paper Transfer Plain 2nd Side S2 ENG 100 to 600 120 5 step 297 mm S2 size 275 mm Paper width 009 Paper Transfer Plain 1st Side S3 ENG 010 Paper Transfer Plain 2nd Side S3 ENG 100 to...

Page 715: ...usted with SP2772 001 Paper Transfer Plain 1st Side ENG 0 to 400 100 5 step 002 Paper Transfer Plain 2nd Side ENG 0 to 400 100 5 step 003 Paper Transfer Plain 1st Side ENG 0 to 400 100 5 step 2771 Adj...

Page 716: ...ENG 006 Separation DC Plain 2nd Side ENG 007 Separation DC Plain 1st Side ENG 0 to 50 0 2 mm step Special 1 Trailing Edge Correction Special 1 Paper Trailing Edge Correction 2773 Adjusts the correctio...

Page 717: ...Paper Transfer FINE 1st Side ENG 005 Separation DC Plain 1st Side ENG 006 Separation DC Plain 2nd Side ENG 007 Separation DC Plain 1st Side ENG 0 to 50 0 2 mm step 2780 Special 1 Environment Correctio...

Page 718: ...Separation DC Plain 1st Side ENG 0 to 4000 2000 10 V step 002 Separation DC Plain 2nd Side ENG 0 to 4000 3000 10 V step 003 Separation DC Plain 1st Side ENG 0 to 4000 2000 10 V step Special 2 Bias BW...

Page 719: ...rection 2811 Adjusts the size correction coefficient for the paper transfer roller current for each paper size SP2803 and SP2807 are multiplied by these SP values Plain 154 mm sec Fine 77 mm sec 001 P...

Page 720: ...mm Paper width 014 Paper Transfer Plain 2nd Side S4 ENG 100 to 600 220 5 step 210 mm S4 size 148 mm Paper width 015 Paper Transfer FINE 1st Side S4 ENG 016 Paper Transfer FINE 2nd Side S4 ENG 100 to 6...

Page 721: ...can be adjusted with SP2822 001 Paper Transfer Plain 1st Side ENG 0 to 400 100 5 step 002 Paper Transfer Plain 2nd Side ENG 0 to 400 100 5 step 003 Paper Transfer Plain 1st Side ENG 0 to 400 100 5 ste...

Page 722: ...d Side ENG 007 Separation DC Plain 1st Side ENG 0 to 50 0 2 mm step Special 2 Trailing Edge Correction Special 2 Paper Trailing Edge Correction 2823 Adjusts the correction to the paper transfer roller...

Page 723: ...ENG 0 to 50 0 2 mm step 003 Paper Transfer Plain 1st Side ENG 005 Separation DC Plain 1st Side ENG 006 Separation DC Plain 2nd Side ENG 007 Separation DC Plain 1st Side ENG 0 to 50 0 2 mm step 2830 Sp...

Page 724: ...2 Fine 77 mm sec 001 Separation DC Thick 1 1st Side ENG 0 to 4000 2000 10 V step 002 Separation DC Thick 1 2nd Side ENG 0 to 4000 3000 10 V step 003 Separation DC Thick 1 1st Side ENG 0 to 4000 2000...

Page 725: ...tion 2861 Adjusts the size correction coefficient for the paper transfer roller current for each paper size SP2852 and SP2857 are multiplied by these SP values Thick 1 and Thick 2 Fine 77 mm sec 001 P...

Page 726: ...step 148 mm S5 size Paper width 018 Paper Transfer Thick 1 2nd Side S5 ENG 100 to 600 180 5 step 148 mm S5 size Paper width Special 3 Leading Edge Correction Special 3 Paper Leading Edge Correction 28...

Page 727: ...1st Side ENG 0 to 400 100 5 step Special 3 Switch Timing Lead Edge 2872 Adjusts the bias voltage switch timing of the paper transfer roller discharge plate at the paper leading edge between the erase...

Page 728: ...aper Transfer Thick 1 1st Side ENG 005 Separation DC Thick 1 1st Side ENG 006 Separation DC Thick 1 2nd Side ENG 007 Separation DC Plain 1st Side ENG 0 to 400 100 5 step Special 3 Switch Timing Trail...

Page 729: ...11 1 step 007 Separation DC Plain 1st Side ENG 1 to 60 26 1 step 009 Paper Transfer 1200 BW 1st Side ENG 1 to 60 11 1 step 011 Paper Transfer 1200 FC 1st Side ENG 1 to 60 1 1 step OPC Drum Brake Time...

Page 730: ...k 1 and Thick 2 Fine 77 mm sec 003 Plain ENG 004 Thick 1 ENG 005 Thick 2 FINE ENG 300 to 1500 500 10 msec step OPC Drum Reverse Time 2904 Adjusts the time for how long the image transfer belt motor re...

Page 731: ...e transfer belt away from the color PCUs when the number of B W image printouts reaches the number of sheets specified with this SP after consecutive full color image printouts in the full color mode...

Page 732: ...ormal 1 synchro Motor Stop Control 2910 Not used 001 On ENG 0 to 1 0 1 sheet step 0 normal 1 synchro 2911 Offset Angle 001 Y Drum ENG 002 C Drum ENG 003 M Drum ENG 004 K Drum ENG 0 to 359 0 1 deg step...

Page 733: ...on the laser optics housing unit manually for test purposes 005 Brake Open ENG 0 to 200 100 10 msec step 006 Brake Close ENG 0 to 200 100 10 msec step 007 Existence ENG 0 or 1 1 1 msec step 2920 Tran...

Page 734: ...SM Appendix 2960 Process Interval 001 Additional Time ENG 0 to 10 0 1 sec step 2970 Cleaning After JOB 001 No Refresh ENG 0 or 1 0 1 step 002 Refresh ENG 0 or 1 1 1 step 2971 T1 Non Image Area ON Timi...

Page 735: ...ep Executes the toner density adjustment manually 003 Pre ACC 0 or 1 0 1 step Executes the process control that is normally done before ACC The type of process control is selected with SP3 041 004 004...

Page 736: ...Y C M K e g 11 Y 99 C 11 M 11 K The self check for Cyan failed but the others were successful See the Error Condition Tables in the Process Control Error section for details 001 History Latest ENG 00...

Page 737: ...1 step 1 Success 2 to 9 Failure 001 Displays the developer initialization result See the Error Condition Tables in the Process Control Error section for details on the meaning of each code All colors...

Page 738: ...or 3020 DFU 001 Delta Vt Threshold ENG 0 to 5 5 0 01 V step 002 Upper Threshold ENG 0 to 5 4 7 0 01 V step 003 Threshold Number of Upper counter ENG 0 to 99 20 1 time step 004 Lower Threshold ENG 0 to...

Page 739: ...M ENG 003 Agitation Time C ENG 004 Agitation Time Y ENG 0 to 200 30 1 sec step 005 008 Sets the execution flag of the developer initialization for each color DFU 005 Execution Flag Bk ENG 006 Executi...

Page 740: ...06 Execution Flag M ENG 007 Execution Flag C ENG 008 Execution Flag Y ENG 0 or 1 0 1 step 0 Flag OFF 1 Flag ON This flag is cleared after executing TD sensor initialization 3041 Process Control Type V...

Page 741: ...o 3 Repeat number 4 Repeat three times No consumption mode 5 Repeat three times Toner is supplied only when the toner density is too low and toner is consumed only when the toner density is too dark 6...

Page 742: ...peats of the toner density adjustment at ACC 0 Disabled 1 to 3 Repeat number 4 Repeat three times No consumption mode 5 Repeat three times Toner is supplied only when the toner density is too low and...

Page 743: ...pecifies the belt mark generating time for checking the magenta toner density when toner density is detected to be low at the toner density adjustment Consumption pattern C ENG 0 to 255 5 1 time step...

Page 744: ...ption mode at the toner density adjustment In toner consumption mode toner is discharged when the detected development gamma values SP3611 002 exceed the target values SP3611 006 by more than the spec...

Page 745: ...n Set 3045 Enables disables the toner alert display on the LCD 001 ON OFF ENG 0 or 1 0 1 step 0 Detect 1 Not Detect Toner End Near End 3101 Displays the amount of each color toner DFU 001 Toner Replen...

Page 746: ...ear end for each color The toner near end message appears on the LCD when the remaining toner amount reaches this threshold When one of these SPs SP3 101 009 to 012 or 032 to 035 reaches this threshol...

Page 747: ...G 024 Delta Vt Sum C ENG 025 Delta Vt Sum Y ENG 0 to 655 0 0 01 V step 026 Delta Vt Sum Threshold ENG 0 to 255 10 1 V step 027 Gamma Threshold Coefficient ENG Not used 028 031 Displays the consumed to...

Page 748: ...043 Pixel M A Y ENG 0 to 1 0 4 0 001 mg cm2 step 044 Delta Vt Threshold Before Near End ENG Adjusts the delta Vt Vt Vtref of toner end before toner near end is detected 0 to 5 0 5 0 01 V step 045 Del...

Page 749: ...ecovery 001 Repeat Bk ENG 002 Repeat M ENG 003 Repeat C ENG 004 Repeat Y ENG 1 to 20 5 1 time step TE Count m Display 3131 Display the number of toner end detections for each color 001 Bk ENG 002 M EN...

Page 750: ...Thick 1 Shift M ENG 003 Thick 1 Shift C ENG 004 Thick 1 Shift Y ENG 005 Thick 2 FINE Shift Bk ENG 006 Thick 2 FINE Shift M ENG 007 Thick 2 FINE Shift C ENG 008 Thick 2 FINE Shift Y ENG 0 to 5 0 46 0...

Page 751: ...C ENG 008 Initial Y ENG 2 to 5 3 86 0 01 V step Vtref Display Set 3222 Displays or adjusts the current Vtref value for each color 001 Current Bk ENG 002 Current M ENG 003 Current C ENG 004 Current Y E...

Page 752: ...justs the lower or upper limit value of Vtref for each color 001 Lower Bk ENG 002 Lower M ENG 003 Lower C ENG 004 Lower Y ENG 0 to 5 2 0 01 V step 005 Upper Bk ENG 006 Upper M ENG 007 Upper C ENG 008...

Page 753: ...n M and L ENG 1 to 10 3 5 0 1 wt step Vtref Correction Pixel DFU 3224 Adjusts the coefficient of Vtref correction for each coverage and color 001 Low Coverage Coefficient Bk ENG 002 Low Coverage Coeff...

Page 754: ...ocess Control Execution Threshold ENG 0 to 255 50 1 time step Toner Supply Setting 3231 Adjusts the coefficient of the toner supply time for each color DFU 001 Replacement Coefficient Bk ENG 0 5 to 9...

Page 755: ...014 Vt Sum Times M ENG 015 Vt Sum Times C ENG 016 Vt Sum Times Y ENG 1 to 255 20 1 time step 3233 Pixel Proportion Coefficient 2 Setting DFU 001 Correction Coefficient 1 ENG 0 to 2 55 1 0 01 step 002...

Page 756: ...ENG 006 Pixel Proportion 3 M ENG 007 Pixel Proportion 3 C ENG 008 Pixel Proportion 3 Y ENG 0 7 to 1 3 1 0 01 step 009 Vt Integral Value Bk ENG 010 Vt Integral Value M ENG 011 Vt Integral Value C ENG...

Page 757: ...ing 3238 Displays the Vt target value at developer initialization DFU 001 Bk ENG 002 M ENG 003 C ENG 004 Y ENG 0 to 5 2 5 0 01 V step Vtref Correction Setting 3239 Adjusts the parameter for Vtref corr...

Page 758: ...to 1 0 2 0 01 V step 3241 Background Potential Setting 001 Coefficient Bk ENG 002 Coefficient M ENG 003 Coefficient C ENG 004 Coefficient Y ENG These are parameters for calculating the charge bias re...

Page 759: ...G 002 Coefficient M ENG 003 Coefficient C ENG 004 Coefficient Y ENG 1000 to 1000 61 1 step 005 Offset Bk ENG 006 Offset M ENG 007 Offset C ENG 008 Offset Y ENG 1000 to 1000 79 1 step Coverage 3251 The...

Page 760: ...average coverage of each color for the Vtref correction Average M is defined when the number of developed pages does not reach the number specified with SP3251 018 009 Average M Bk ENG 010 Average M...

Page 761: ...s the threshold for SP3 251 024 to 027 020 Total Page Setting S2 ENG 1 to 100 20 1 sheet step 021 Total Page Setting M2 ENG 1 to 500 10 1 sheet step 022 Total Page Setting L2 ENG 1 to 999 50 1 sheet s...

Page 762: ...0 to 5 5 0 0 01 V step 005 007 Displays the ID sensor diffusion offset voltage for Vsg adjustments 005 Voffset dif M ENG 006 Voffset dif C ENG 007 Voffset dif Y ENG 0 to 5 5 0 0 01 V step 008 010 Disp...

Page 763: ...reg M ENG 003 Vsg reg C ENG 004 Vsg reg Y ENG 005 Vsg dif M ENG 006 Vsg dif C ENG 007 Vsg dif Y ENG 008 Vsg TM Front ENG 009 Vsg TM Center ENG 010 Vsg TM Rear ENG 0 to 5 5 0 0 01 V step 3323 Vsg Adju...

Page 764: ...djustment Result 3325 Displays the result of the Vsg adjustment The displayed numbers mean the result of each sensor sensor for Front sensor for Bk sensor for Cyan sensor for Center sensor for Magenta...

Page 765: ...3362 ID Sensor Sensitivity Setting DFU 001 K2 Upper ENG 0 to 1 0 32 0 01 step 002 K2 Lower ENG 0 to 1 0 22 0 01 step 003 K5 Upper ENG 0 to 10 5 0 01 step 004 K5 Lower ENG 0 to 1 0 5 0 01 step 005 Kn...

Page 766: ...01 step 3363 ID Pattern Timing Setting DFU 001 Scan YCMBk ENG Adjusts the detection timing for the process control pattern 500 to 500 13 7 1 mm step 002 Paper Transfer Release Start Time ENG Adjusts t...

Page 767: ...0 01 step 004 Correction Coefficient Y ENG 0 5 to 2 0 1 02 0 01 step Fixed Supply Mode 3401 Adjusts the toner supply rate in the fixed toner supply mode 001 Fixed Rate Bk ENG 002 Fixed Rate M ENG 003...

Page 768: ...5 Minimum Supply Time Bk ENG 006 Minimum Supply Time M ENG 007 Minimum Supply Time C ENG 008 Minimum Supply Time Y ENG Adjusts the minimum toner supply time 0 to 1000 0 1 msec step 3451 Toner Supply C...

Page 769: ...4 Maximum M A Y ENG 0 to 1 0 444 0 001 mg cm2 step Image Quality Adj Counter Display 3510 Displays the total page counter for each adjustment mode 001 Potential Control BW ENG 002 Potential Control FC...

Page 770: ...ential Control BW ENG 0 to 2000 250 1 page step 006 Initial Potential Control FC ENG 0 to 2000 100 1 page step 007 Vsg Adj Counter ENG 008 Charge AC Control Counter ENG 0 to 2000 0 1 page step 009 Int...

Page 771: ...2 0 01 page step 023 Correction Coefficient 2 JE BW ENG 0 to 1 1 0 01 step 024 Correction Coefficient 1 JE FC ENG 0 to 1 0 5 0 01 step 025 Correction Coefficient 2 JE FC ENG 0 to 1 1 0 01 step 026 Co...

Page 772: ...e PCU motors stopped These are used for process control execution timing 001 Year ENG 0 to 99 0 1 step 002 Month ENG 1 to 12 1 1 step 003 Date ENG 1 to 31 1 1 step 004 Hour ENG 0 to 23 0 1 step 005 Mi...

Page 773: ...l Control BW ENG 0 to 2000 500 1 page step 004 Interrupt Potential Control FC ENG 0 to 2000 200 1 page step Refresh Mode DFU 3516 While making prints with low coverage the developer is agitated with l...

Page 774: ...old Bk ENG 015 Refresh Threshold M ENG 016 Refresh Threshold C ENG 017 Refresh Threshold Y ENG 0 to 255 14 1 cm2 m step 018 Pattern Generation Number Bk ENG 019 Pattern Generation Number M ENG 020 Pat...

Page 775: ...Job End Supply ENG 0 to 1 0 45 0 001 mg cm2 step Blade damage prevention mode 3517 Adjusts the threshold temperature for preventing the cleaning blade at the drum unit from being damaged If the tempe...

Page 776: ...rol ENG 0 to 2 0 1 step 0 OFF 1 ON once 2 ON twice 008 MUSIC ENG 0 to 2 0 1 step 0 OFF 1 ON once 2 ON twice 009 Drum Phase Adj ENG 010 Charge AC Control ENG 011 Blade Damage Prevention ENG 0 or 1 0 1...

Page 777: ...tial Process Control Setting 3522 Adjusts the threshold for the process control at power on When the current condition has changed by more than the values of these SPs when compared with the condition...

Page 778: ...y Range ENG 0 to 99 50 1 RH step 004 Absolute Humidity Range ENG 0 to 99 6 1 g m3 step 005 Maximum Execution Number ENG Adjusts the maximum execution time for the process control at stand by 0 to 99 1...

Page 779: ...et ENG 012 Y Standard Target Set ENG 0 to 5 0 8 0 01 mg cm2 kV step 013 Environmental Correction ENG Turns on or off the environmental correction for target development gamma 0 or 1 1 0 Not Correct 1...

Page 780: ...pment DC Control Display Plain 154 mm sec Thick 1 and Thick 2 Fine 77 mm sec 3621 Displays the development DC bias adjusted with the process control for each line speed and color 001 Plain Bk ENG 002...

Page 781: ...each line speed and color 001 Plain Bk ENG 002 Plain M ENG 003 Plain C ENG 004 Plain Y ENG 009 Thick 2 FINE Bk ENG 010 Thick 2 FINE M ENG 011 Thick 2 FINE C ENG 012 Thick 2 FINE Y ENG 0 to 2000 690 1...

Page 782: ...Plain Y ENG 005 Thick 1 Bk ENG 006 Thick 1 M ENG 007 Thick 1 C ENG 008 Thick 1 Y ENG 009 Thick 2 FINE Bk ENG 010 Thick 2 FINE M ENG 011 Thick 2 FINE C ENG 012 Thick 2 FINE Y ENG 0 to 200 100 1 step HS...

Page 783: ...NG 005 Sensitivity ML ENG 0 to 2 55 1 05 0 01 V step 006 Set Detection ENG 0 to 5 1 0 1 V step 007 Without Developer ENG 0 to 5 1 2 0 1 V step 008 With Developer ENG 0 to 5 1 3 0 1 V step 009 Serial N...

Page 784: ...5 1 05 0 01 V step 005 Sensitivity ML ENG 006 Set Detection ENG 0 to 5 1 0 1 V step 007 Without Developer ENG 0 to 5 1 2 0 1 V step 008 With Developer ENG 0 to 5 1 3 0 1 V step 009 Serial Number 1 ENG...

Page 785: ...G 005 Sensitivity ML ENG 0 to 2 55 1 05 0 01 V step 006 Set Detection ENG 0 to 5 1 0 1 V step 007 Without Developer ENG 0 to 5 1 2 0 1 V step 008 With Developer ENG 0 to 5 1 3 0 1 V step 009 Serial Nu...

Page 786: ...tivity ML ENG 0 to 2 55 1 05 0 01 V step 006 Set Detection ENG 0 to 5 1 0 1 V step 007 Without Developer ENG 0 to 5 1 2 0 1 V step 008 With Developer ENG 0 to 5 1 3 0 1 V step 009 Serial Number 1 ENG...

Page 787: ...on bottle 0 to 200000 1 cm2 step 008 Coefficient ENG 0 5 to 1 5 1 0 1 step Notice Setting ENG Enables or disables the calling for Remote 0 or 1 1 0 Enable Remote calling 1 Disable Remote calling 011 N...

Page 788: ...ection bottle full detection on or off 001 ON OFF Setting ENG 0 or 1 1 0 OFF 1 ON New PCU Detection 3901 Turns new PCU detection on or off 001 ON OFF Setting ENG 0 or 1 1 0 OFF 1 ON Manual New Unit Se...

Page 789: ...1 0 0 OFF 1 ON 009 PCU Bk ENG 010 PCU Y ENG 011 PCU M ENG 012 PCU C ENG 0 or 1 0 0 OFF 1 ON 013 Image Transfer Unit ENG 014 Fusing Unit ENG 015 Cleaning Unit ENG 016 Paper Transfer Unit ENG 017 Toner...

Page 790: ...Adjustment ENG 1 0 to 1 0 0 0 1 step FA Leading Edge Registration Adjustment 4010 Adjusts the leading edge registration by changing the scanning start timing in the sub scan direction 001 ENG 2 0 to 2...

Page 791: ...k Left 004 Book Right ENG 0 to 3 0 0 0 1 mm step FA 005 ADF Leading Edge 007 ADF Right 008 ADF Left ENG 0 to 3 0 0 0 1 mm step FA Scanner Free Run 4013 Performs the scanner free run with the exposure...

Page 792: ...the detect level 0 to 8 4 1 step 0 lowest detection level 8 highest detection level 003 Correction Level ENG Selects the level of the sub scan line correction when using the ARDF 0 to 4 0 1 step 0 Off...

Page 793: ...HLT 16K ENG 0 to 2 0 1 step 0 No Original 1 A5 Lengthwise 16K SEF if 4305 is set to 3 2 A5 Sideways 16K LEF if 4305 is set to 3 4305 8K 16K Detection ENG 0 to 3 0 1 step 0 Normal Detection the machin...

Page 794: ...tern 001 Test Pattern Selection 0 to 24 0 1 step 0 Scanned image 1 Gradation main scan A 2 Gradation main scan B 3 Gradation main scan C 4 Gradation main scan D 5 Gradation sub scan 1 6 Grid pattern 7...

Page 795: ...ent 4440 Adjusts the level of saturation for copying 001 Saturation Adj 1 ENG 0 to 5 3 1 step 0 High 1 Lowest 2 Lower 3 Default 4 Higher 5 Highest 4450 Scan Image Path Selection Black Subtraction ON O...

Page 796: ...ning method platen ADF 001 Lower Limit ENG 0 to 1023 364 4 digit step 002 Background Level ENG 512 to 1532 932 1 digit step ACC Target Density 4501 Selects the ACC result 001 Copy Bk Text ENG 002 Copy...

Page 797: ...hine Y ENG 128 to 127 0 1 step 005 Other Machine Bk ENG 006 Other Machine M ENG 007 Other Machine C ENG 008 Other Machine Y ENG Reserved ACC Offset Dark 4506 Adjusts the offset correction for dark are...

Page 798: ...Option R G B 021 024 CG Phase Option R G B 025 028 CB Phase Option R G B 029 032 BC Phase Option R G B 033 036 BM Phase Option R G B 037 040 MB Phase Option R G B 041 044 MR Phase Option R G B 045 04...

Page 799: ...trast Set higher for stronger effect lower for weaker effect Smoothing 0 x1 1 7 Strong ENG 0 to 7 4 1 step 006 Use to remove jaggies if they appear Set higher for smoother images Brightness 1 255 ENG...

Page 800: ...higher for smoother images Brightness 1 255 ENG 1 to 255 128 1 step 007 Set higher for darker set lower for lighter Contrast 1 255 ENG 1 to 255 128 1 step 008 Set higher for more contrast set lower fo...

Page 801: ...to remove jaggies if they appear Set higher for smoother images Brightness 1 255 ENG 1 to 255 128 1 step 007 Set higher for darker set lower for lighter Contrast 1 255 ENG 1 to 255 128 1 step 008 Set...

Page 802: ...1 step Executes the AGC 002 HP Detection Disable 0 or 1 0 1 step DFU 4604 FGATE Open Close DFU 001 Opens or closes the FGATE signal This SP automatically returns to the default status close after exit...

Page 803: ...6383 0 1 digit step 002 Latest RO Color Displays the black offset value rough adjustment for the odd red signal in the CCD circuit board color printing speed 0 to 16383 0 1 digit step 4624 Black Level...

Page 804: ...lue rough adjustment for the odd blue signal in the CCD circuit board color printing speed 0 to 16383 0 1 digit step Gain Adjustment Analog 4628 Displays the gain value of the amplifiers on the contro...

Page 805: ...s the gain value of the amplifiers on the controller for Green 001 Latest GE Color 002 Latest GO Color 0 to 1023 0 1 digit step Gain Adjustment Digital 4633 Displays the gain value of the amplifiers o...

Page 806: ...ting speed 0 to 16383 0 1 digit step 002 Last Correct Value RO Color ENG Displays the black offset value rough adjustment for the odd red signal in the CCD circuit board color printing speed 0 to 1638...

Page 807: ...adjustment for the odd blue signal in the CCD circuit board color printing speed 0 to 16383 0 1 digit step Gain Adjustment Analog 4658 Displays the previous gain value of the amplifiers on the control...

Page 808: ...BE Blue Even signal BO Blue Odd signal 001 Last Correct Value BE Color ENG 002 Last Correct Value BO Color ENG 0 to 1023 0 1 digit step 4673 Black Level Adj Display RE Red Even signal RO Red Odd signa...

Page 809: ...CD circuit board color printing speed 0 to 16383 0 1 digit step 4675 Black Level Adj Display BE Blue Even signal BO Blue Odd signal 001 Factory Setting BE Color ENG Displays the factory setting values...

Page 810: ...ustment Digital 4680 Displays the gain value of the amplifiers on the controller for Red 001 Factory Setting RE Color ENG 002 Factory Setting RO Color ENG 0 to 1023 0 1 digit step Gain Adjustment Digi...

Page 811: ...in the DF and Platen mode is different 001 ENG 50 to 150 100 1 step White Level Peak Read 4690 Displays the peak level of the white level scanning 001 RE 002 RO 0 to 1023 0 1 digit step White Level P...

Page 812: ...lack level scanning 001 GE 002 GO 0 to 1023 0 1 digit step Black Level Read 4695 Displays the peak level of the black level scanning 001 BE 002 BO 0 to 1023 0 1 digit step 4802 DF Shading FreeRun 001...

Page 813: ...a long distance 4807 SBU Test Pattern Change 001 0 to 255 0 1 step ACC Data Display 4902 This SP outputs the final data read at the end of ACC execution A zero is returned if there was an error readi...

Page 814: ...ays the result Test2 Bit0 Image path from SBU to TAURUS Bit1 Image path from TAURUS to ORION Bit2 Image path from ORION to TAURUS Bit3 Image path from TAURUS to LUPUS Bit4 to 11 Not used Bit12 Image p...

Page 815: ...lects the image path Enter the number to be selected using the 10 key pad RGB Frame Memory ENG 0 to 11 2 1 step 001 0 Scanner input RGB images 1 Scanner I F RGB images 2 RGB images done by Shading cor...

Page 816: ...y 9 strongest sensitivity 002 Range Selection ENG Selects the range level of Highlight correction 0 to 9 4 1 step 0 weakest skew correction 9 strongest skew correction Text Photo Detection Level Adj 4...

Page 817: ...unting method NOTE The counting method can be changed only once regardless of whether the counter value is negative or positive 001 Counter Method CTL 0 or 1 0 0 Developments 1 Prints Paper Display 50...

Page 818: ...056 Display or does not display the coverage counter on the LCD 001 CTL 0 or 1 0 0 Not display 1 Display Toner Remaining Icon Display 5061 Display or does not display the remaining toner display icon...

Page 819: ...003 PCU C CTL 004 PCU Y CTL 0 Service or 1 User 005 Dev Unit Bk CTL 006 Dev Unit M CTL 007 Dev Unit C CTL 008 Dev Unit Y CTL 0 Service or 1 User 009 Developer Bk CTL 010 Developer M CTL 011 Developer...

Page 820: ...dard paper size can be input for the universal cassette trays Tray 2 and Optional paper tray unit trays 1 and 2 0 or 1 0 0 OFF 1 ON If 1 is selected the customer will be able to input a non standard p...

Page 821: ...ed but not used 2 No not removed 001 This program updates the information on the optional counter When you install or remove an optional counter check the settings 5121 Counter Up Timing CTL 0 Feed 1...

Page 822: ...y is used or not Normally the paper length for sub scanning paper from the by pass tray is limited to 600 mm but this can be extended with this SP to 1260 mm 5162 App Switch Method CTL 0 Soft Key Set...

Page 823: ...urns on or off the by pass tray size error message 001 ENG 0 or 1 0 1 step 0 OFF 1 ON Paper size error message is displayed when the paper jam occurs due to the wrong direction of set paper in by pass...

Page 824: ...SIA 1 NA 0 A3 1 DLT 008 TRAY 3 3 ENG 0 or 1 0 EU ASIA 1 NA 0 B4 1 LG 009 TRAY 3 4 ENG 0 or 1 0 EU ASIA 1 NA 0 B5 LEF 1 Exe LEF 010 TRAY 4 1 ENG 0 or 1 0 EU ASIA 1 NA 0 A4 LEF 1 LT LEF 011 TRAY 4 2 ENG...

Page 825: ...nected for 10 seconds when this SP is set to 1 Enable the machine automatically jams a sheet of paper and stops 001 ENG 0 or 1 0 1 step 0 Disable 1 Enable Copy NV Version 5188 Displays the version num...

Page 826: ...positions to the right edge 003 Duplex Printout Right Left Position 10 to 10 0 1 mm step 004 Duplex Printout High Low Position 10 to 10 0 1 mm step Set Time 5302 Adjusts the RTC real time clock time...

Page 827: ...its in this SP For months 1 to 9 the 0 cannot be input in the first digit so the eight digit setting for 2 or 3 becomes a seven digit setting 1st and 2nd digits The month 1 to 12 3rd digit The week of...

Page 828: ...igits must be set to 00 The digits are counted from the left Make sure that SP5 307 1 is set to 1 Access Control 5401 When installing the SDK application SAS VAS adjusts the following settings DFU 103...

Page 829: ...ice SDK is the Software Development Kit This data can be converted from SAS VAS when installed or uninstalled DFU 5404 User Code Counter Clear 001 UCodeCtrClr Clears all counters for users 5411 LDAP C...

Page 830: ...ockout Setting 001 Lockout On Off CTL Switches on off the lock on the local address book account 0 to 1 0 1 0 Off 1 On 002 Lockout Threshold CTL Sets a limit on the frequency of lockouts for account l...

Page 831: ...CTL Switches on off masking of continuously used IDs and passwords that are identical 0 to 1 0 1 0 Off 1 On 002 Mitigation Time CTL Sets the length of time for excluding continuous access for identic...

Page 832: ...03 Monitor Interval CTL Sets the processing time interval for referencing user ID and password information 1 to 10 3 1 sec 5417 Access Attack 001 Access Permissible Number CTL Sets a limit on access a...

Page 833: ...been enabled 001 Copy CTL Determines whether certification is required before a user can use the copy applications 0 to 1 0 1 0 On 1 Off 002 Color Security Setting NOTE Enabling the SP Mode Value 1 fo...

Page 834: ...K3 CTL 0 or 1 0 1 0 ON 1 OFF Determines whether certification is required before a user can use the SDK application Authentication Error Code 5481 These SP codes determine how the authentication failu...

Page 835: ...o sound for the specified jam level document misfeeds are not included 0 to 3 3 1 step 0 Zero Off 1 Low 2 5K jams 2 Medium 3K jams 3 High 6K jams Error Alarm 5505 Sets the error alarm level The error...

Page 836: ...rm 0 Off 1 On DFU 080 Toner Call Timing Changes the timing of the Toner Supply Call via the Remote when the following conditions occur 0 Toner is replaced 1 Toner near end or End 128 Interval Others 1...

Page 837: ...e front door remains open Jam Detection Time Length 3 to 30 10 1 minute step 011 Sets the time a jam must remain before it becomes an unattended paper jam This setting is enabled only when SP5508 004...

Page 838: ...001 SC Call 002 Service Parts Near End Call 003 Service Parts End Call 004 User Call 0 or 1 1 0 Off 1 On 006 Communication Test Call 007 Machine Information Notice 008 Alarm Notice 009 Non Genuine Ton...

Page 839: ...C ENG 0 to 128 100 1 step 128 Darkest density 001 Adjusts the Cyan correction value of the blue signal in two color mode B M ENG 0 to 128 100 1 step 128 Darkest density 002 Adjusts the Magenta correct...

Page 840: ...e Yellow correction value of the blue signal in two color mode 5618 Color Mode Display Selection CTL 0 or 1 1 0 ACS Colour Black White Two Colour Single colour 1 ACD Full Colour Black White 001 Select...

Page 841: ...all copier application settings 007 Fax application Initializes the fax reset time job login ID all TX RX settings local storage file numbers and off hook timer 008 Printer application The following...

Page 842: ...lizes the DCS Delivery Control Service settings 015 Clear UCS Settings Initializes the UCS User Information Control Service settings 016 MIRS Setting Initializes the MIRS Machine Information Report Se...

Page 843: ...d in the 1st tray or 2nd tray but paper is not fed The main switch has to be turned off and on after using the free run mode for a test 001 TRAY1 A4LEF FC 002 TRAY2 A3 FC 003 TRAY2 A4SEF FC 5803 Input...

Page 844: ...t which can be printed with the user s Counter menu This can be up to 20 characters both numbers and alphabetic characters can be input Facsimile CTL 002 Sets the fax or telephone number for a service...

Page 845: ...of the service 1 End of the service NOTE This SP is activated only when SP 5816 001 is set to 2 Function Flag 003 Enables or disables the remote service function 0 to 1 0 1 step 0 Disabled 1 Enabled D...

Page 846: ...the RCG 1 to 100 60 1 second step Port 80 Enable 011 Enables disables access via port 80 to the SOAP method 0 or 1 0 0 Disabled 1 Enabled RCG C Registed 021 This SP displays the Cumin installation en...

Page 847: ...set up Cumin N The address display is limited to 128 characters Characters beyond the 128 character are ignored This address is customer information and is not printed in the SMC report Proxy Port Nu...

Page 848: ...being notified of the successful update 3 The certification update failed and the GW URL is being notified of the failed update 4 The period of the certification has expired and new request for an up...

Page 849: ...corded and the GW URL is being notified of the failure of the certification update CERT Error Displays a number code that describes the reason for the request for update of the certification 0 Normal...

Page 850: ...he firmware data files during the firmware update execution 087 CERT Macro Version Displays the macro version of the NRS certification 088 CERT PAC Version Displays the PAC version of the NRS certific...

Page 851: ...SP codes for Cumin M SP5816 153 SP5816 154 SP5816 161 0 Japan 1 USA 2 Canada 3 UK 4 Germany 5 France 6 Italy 7 Netherlands 8 Belgium 9 Luxembourg 10 Spain Line Type Authentication Judgment 151 Touch...

Page 852: ...not supported 7 Error because fax transmission in progress ioctl occurred 8 Other error occurred 9 Line classification still in progress Please wait Selection Dial Push 153 This SP displays the class...

Page 853: ...a 2 sec pause The number setting for the external line can be entered manually including commas Dial Up User Name 156 Use this SP to set a user name for access to remote dial up Follow these rules wh...

Page 854: ...Cumin M If no setting is done for this SP code then a preset value determined by the country selected is used Default 0 Allowed Up to 16 alphanumeric characters 164 Line Connecting This SP sets the c...

Page 855: ...ansmission in progress to open the line for fax transaction This SP can be used only if SP5816 164 is set to 0 0 or 1 0 0 Disable 1 Enable 200 Manual Polling Executes the manual polling Regist Status...

Page 856: ...er error 9 Inquiry executing Confirm Place 205 Displays the result of the notification sent to the device from the GW URL in answer to the inquiry request Displayed only when the result is registered...

Page 857: ...acquiring device status 12003 Attempted registration without execution of an inquiry and no previous registration Operation Error Incorrect Setting 12004 Attempted setting with illegal entries for cer...

Page 858: ...RCG Remote Communication Gate destination for call processing at the remote service center NV RAM Data Upload 5824 Uploads the UP and SP mode data except for counters and the serial number from the NV...

Page 859: ...ed This SP is activated only when SP5 828 50 is set to 1 065 Job Spooling Enables disables Job Spooling 0 or 1 0 1 step 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 066 Job Spooling Clear Start Time Treatment of the job when...

Page 860: ...6 bits each 147 Active IPv6 Stateless Address 1 149 Active IPv6 Stateless Address 2 151 Active IPv6 Stateless Address 3 153 Active IPv6 Stateless Address 4 155 Active IPv6 Stateless Address 5 These SP...

Page 861: ...does not display the Web system items 0 x 0000 to 0 x ffff 0 x ffff 0 Not displayed 1 Displayed bit0 Net RICOH bit1 Consumable Supplier bit2 15 Reserved all 237 Web shopping link visible Displays or...

Page 862: ...isplay 1 Display 242 Web Link2 Name Same as 239 243 Web Link2 URL Same as 240 244 Web Link2 visible Same as 241 5832 HDD HDD Initialization CTL 001 HDD Formatting ALL 002 HDD Formatting IMH 003 HDD Fo...

Page 863: ...nt Reduction The following 6 SP modes set the default reduction for stored documents sent to the document management server via the MLB Enabled only when optional MLB Media Link Board is installed 071...

Page 864: ...d in this model 082 Format for Copy B W Text 0 JFIF JPEG 1 TIFF MMR 2 TIFF MH 3 TIFF MR 083 Format Copy B W Other 0 JFIF JPEG 1 TIFF MMR 2 TIFF MH 3 TIFF MR 084 Format for Printer Color 0 JFIF JPEG 1...

Page 865: ...rver This is basically adjusted by the remote system 112 Secondary srv scheme This is basically adjusted by the remote system 113 Secondary srv port number This is basically adjusted by the remote sys...

Page 866: ...ed by the remote system 0 to 5 3 1 step 124 Selects the resolution for BW print mode This is basically adjusted by the remote system 0 600dpi 1 400dpi 2 300dpi 3 200dpi 4 150dpi 5 100dpi 5839 IEEE1394...

Page 867: ...ators log off 0 or 1 1 0 OFF Prevents the initiators having already logged on to log on if they try to log on 1 ON Makes initiators having already logged on to log off if they try to log on 012 Login...

Page 868: ...for the maximum end of the range for each area Adjust the upper 4 bits to set the maximum number of channels DFU Do not change the setting Channel Min CTL 1 to 11 or 13 1 1 step Europe 1 to 13 NA Asia...

Page 869: ...FE reserved 0 x 12 72M reserved 0 x 09 22M reserved 011 WEP key Select CTL Selects the WEP key 00 to 11 00 1 binary 00 Key 1 01 Key 2 Reserved 10 Key 3 Reserved 11 Key 4 Reserved 042 Fragment Thresh...

Page 870: ...fo 2 warning 3 error This SP is displayed only when the IEEE802 11 card is installed 5841 Supply Name Setting 001 Toner Name Setting Black 002 Toner Name Setting Cyan 003 Toner Name Setting Yellow 004...

Page 871: ...inder software 002 Setting 2 CTL Adjusts the debug program modesetting Bit7 5682 mmseg log setting 0 Date Hour Minute Second 1 Minute Second Msec 0 to 6 Not used 5844 USB Transfer Rate CTL 0x01 Full s...

Page 872: ...999 300 1 second step 006 Use this setting to determine the length of time the prompt message is displayed when a test error occurs during document transfer with the NetFile application and an externa...

Page 873: ...ender password function exists Bit1 1 Function to link MK 1 user and Sender exists 010 Bit0 1 Sender specification required if set to 1 Bit6 is set to 0 Delivery Svr Capability Ext 0 to 255 0 1 step C...

Page 874: ...Secondary DFU 018 This is used for the scan router program Capture Server Scheme DFU 019 This is used for the scan router program Capture Server Port Number DFU 020 This is used for the scan router pr...

Page 875: ...ID the ID will be established again automatically by cycling the machine off and on Maximum Entries 2000 to 20000 2000 1 step 003 Changes the maximum number of entries that UCS can handle If a value s...

Page 876: ...dress book on the HDD can be accessed only by the system administrator at this stage Executing this SP by the service technician immediately after power on grants full address book access to all users...

Page 877: ...All Addr Book Clears all directory information managed by UCS including all user codes 051 Backup All Addr Book Uploads all directory information to the SD card 052 Restore All Addr Book Downloads al...

Page 878: ...limits the password entry to upper case and sets the length of the password 0 to 32 0 1 step This SP does not normally require adjustment This SP is enabled only after the system administrator has set...

Page 879: ...B W Other 004 Rate for Printer Color 005 Rate for Printer B W 0 1x 1 1 2x 2 1 3x 3 1 4x 4 1 6x 5 1 8x Network Quality Default for JPEG 021 Sets the default value for the quality of JPEG images sent a...

Page 880: ...ivery Lower 4 bits 022 Access Ctrl uAdministration Lower 4bits Switches access control on and off 0000 No access control 0001 Denies access to DeskTop Binder 100 Repository Download Image Max Size Spe...

Page 881: ...03 The machine is sold ready to use with a G3 line This SP allows you to switch all at once to convert to G4 after you add a G4 line Conversely if for some reason the G4 line becomes unusable you can...

Page 882: ...D 3 SD 2 HDD 3 SD Card 002 Selects the storage device to save debug logs information when the conditions set with SP5 858 are satisfied 2 to 3 2 1 step Save to HDD 005 Saves the debug log of the input...

Page 883: ...ion to be saved to the destination selected by SP5857 002 SP5858 3 stores one SC specified by number Refer to Section 4 for a list of SC error codes 001 Engine SC Error Turns on off the debug save for...

Page 884: ...ug Save Key No CTL 001 Key 1 002 Key 2 003 Key 3 004 Key 4 005 Key 5 006 Key 6 007 Key 7 008 Key 8 009 Key 9 010 Key 10 These SPs allow you to set up to 10 keys for log files for functions that use co...

Page 885: ...ompliance 0 to 1 1 Determines whether RFC2298 compliance is switched on for MDN reply mail 0 No 1 Yes 022 SMTP Auth From Field Replacement 0 to 1 0 Determines whether the FROM item of the mail header...

Page 886: ...n Key Info Writing 001 Writing CTL Writes to flash ROM the common proof for validating the device for NRS specifications 5873 SD Card Appli Move 001 Move Exec This SP copies the application programs f...

Page 887: ...e SC occurs again the machine does not reboot 1 The machine does not reboot when an SC error occurs The reboot is not executed for Type A or C SC codes 002 Reboot Type CTL Selects the reboot method fo...

Page 888: ...sclose the functions of web image monitor 020 Document Server ACC Ctrl CTL 0 OFF 1 ON Bit Meaning 0 Forbid all document server access 1 1 Forbid user mode access 1 2 Forbid print function 1 3 Forbid f...

Page 889: ...ether the ROM can be updated 001 CTL 0 or 1 0 1 step 0 ON 1 OFF SD Get Counter DFU 5887 This SP sends a text file to an SD card inserted in SD card Slot 2 lower slot and stored in a folder created in...

Page 890: ...n 2 SP5 894 001 2 With this setting it is possible to distinguish between B W and color outputs for both the Copier and Printer However it is not possible to manage FAX reception documents 5895 Applic...

Page 891: ...5985 The NIC and USB support features are built into the GW controller Use this SP to enable and disable these features In order to use the NIC and USB functions built into the controller board these...

Page 892: ...al counter device is removed If it is detected SC610 occurs SP print mode 5990 Prints out the SMC sheets 001 All Data List 002 SP Mode Data List 003 User Program 004 Logging Data 005 Diagnostic Report...

Page 893: ...riginal skew for the front and rear sides 005 Buckle Duplex Front 3 0 to 3 0 0 0 1 mm step 006 Buckle Duplex Rear ENG 2 5 to 2 5 0 0 1 mm step Adjusts the erase margin at the original trailing edge 00...

Page 894: ...d originals 6010 1 Stamp Position Adj ENG 5 0 to 5 0 0 1 mm step Original Size Detection Priority Original Size Detection Priority 6016 Specifies the original size for a size detected by the original...

Page 895: ...to 4 0 0 0 4 mm step Punch Position Sub Scan 6128 Adjusts the punching position in the sub scan direction 001 Domestic Japan 2Hole ENG 002 North America 3Hole ENG 003 Europe 4Hole ENG 004 North Europe...

Page 896: ...Correction Buckle Adj 6130 Adjusts the paper buckle for each paper size 001 A3T ENG 002 B4T ENG 003 A4T ENG 004 A4Y ENG 005 B5T ENG 006 B5Y ENG 007 DLT T ENG 008 LG T ENG 009 LT T ENG 010 LT Y ENG 011...

Page 897: ...G 012 Other ENG 0 or 1 1 1 step 0 No No skew correction 1 Roller Stop Skew Correction Jogger Fence Fine Adj 6132 This SP adjusts the distance between the jogger fences and the sides of the stack on th...

Page 898: ...010 LT Y ENG 011 12 x 18 ENG 012 Other ENG Staple Position Adjustment 6133 Adjusts the staple position for each finisher B408 B793 D372 Value Moves the staple position to the rear side Value Moves the...

Page 899: ...DLT T 006 LG T 007 LT T 008 12 x 18 009 Other 3 0 to 3 0 0 0 2 mm step Value Shifts staple position toward the crease Value Shifts staple position away from the crease 6135 Folder Position Adj User S...

Page 900: ...aper edge stapling 002 Free Run 2 Free run for booklet stapling 003 Free Run 3 Shipping free run Simulates standby conditions during shipping 004 Free Run 4 DFU 6138 FIN TIG INPUT Check Finisher B793...

Page 901: ...lays the signals received from sensors and switches of the booklet finisher Output Check Table in this section 6144 FIN KIN OUPUT Check Finisher B408 Output Check Displays the signals received from se...

Page 902: ...output jogger unit attached to the side of the machine jogs sheets as they exit the finisher Value Increases distance between jogger fences and the sides of the stack Value Decreases the distance betw...

Page 903: ...eck 6152 Displays the signals received from sensors and switches of the shift tray D388 Input Check Table in this section OUTPUT Check 6153 Displays the signals received from sensors and switches of t...

Page 904: ...ived from sensors and switches of the two tray paper feed unit D351 2000 sheet LCT D352 or 1200 sheet LCT D353 Input Check Table in this section OUTPUT Check 6161 Displays the signals received from se...

Page 905: ...ory 7403 Logs the SC codes detected The 10 most recently detected SC Codes are not displayed on the screen but can be seen on the SMC logging outputs 001 Latest 002 Latest 1 003 Latest 2 004 Latest 3...

Page 906: ...ng to the location where jams were detected NOTE The LCT is counted as the 3rd feed station 001 At Power On CTL 003 Tray 1 ON CTL 004 Tray 2 ON CTL 005 Tray 3 ON CTL 006 Tray 4 ON CTL 008 Bypass ON CT...

Page 907: ...SEF Sensor 2 CTL 053 Bank SEF Sensor 1 CTL 054 Bank SEF Sensor 2 CTL 057 Regist Sensor CTL 059 Fusing Exit Sensor CTL 060 Exit Sensor CTL 061 Relay Exit Sensor CTL 062 Relay Sensor CTL 065 Duplex Exi...

Page 908: ...isher Shift Tray Exit EUP CTL 194 Finisher Stapler Exit EUP CTL 195 Finisher Exit EUP CTL 196 Finisher Staple EUP CTL 197 Finisher Saddle Stitch Staple EUP CTL 198 Finisher Folder EUP CTL 199 Finisher...

Page 909: ...on 7505 Displays the total number of original jams by location 001 At Power On 003 Separation ON 004 Skew Correction ON 005 Reading Entrance Sensor ON 006 Registration ON 007 Reading Exit Sensor ON 00...

Page 910: ...r Size 7506 Displays the number of jams according to the paper size 005 A4 LEF 006 A5 LEF 014 B5 LEF 038 LT LEF 044 HLT LEF 132 A3 SEF 133 A4 SEF 134 A5 SEF 141 B4 SEF 142 B5 SEF 160 DLT SEF 164 LG SE...

Page 911: ...023 D025 Appendix SP Mode Tables Plotter Jam History 7507 Displays the 10 most recently detected paper jams 001 Latest 002 Latest 1 003 Latest 2 004 Latest 3 005 Latest 4 006 Latest 5 007 Latest 6 008...

Page 912: ...ently detected original jams 001 Latest 002 Latest 1 003 Latest 2 004 Latest 3 005 Latest 4 006 Latest 5 007 Latest 6 008 Latest 7 009 Latest 8 010 Latest 9 CTL 7801 ROM No 002 Engine ENG 005 ADF ENG...

Page 913: ...s click up based on the number of A4 LT LEF size sheets printed Therefore the A3 DLT Double Count is activated The Double Count cannot be deactivated When a unit is replaced the machine automatically...

Page 914: ...tle Displays the number of revolutions of motors or clutches for each current maintenance unit 0 to 9999999 0 1 revolution step When a unit is replaced the machine automatically detects that the new u...

Page 915: ...otation Paper Transfer Unit 047 Measurement Toner Collection bottle Displays the value given by the following formula Current revolution Target revolution 100 This shows how much of the unit s expecte...

Page 916: ...ng Unit 076 Rotation Paper Transfer Unit 077 Measurement Toner Collection bottle Displays the value given by the following formula Current printouts Target printouts 100 This shows how much of the uni...

Page 917: ...Developer Bk 100 Page Developer M 101 Page Developer C 102 Page Developer Y 103 Page Image Transfer 104 Page Cleaning Unit 105 Page Fusing Unit 106 Page Paper Transfer Unit 7804 PM Counter Reset PM C...

Page 918: ...Unit Bk 008 Development Unit M 009 Development Unit C 010 Development Unit Y 011 Development Unit All 012 Developer Bk 013 Developer M 014 Developer C 015 Developer Y 016 Developer All 017 Image Tran...

Page 919: ...play 7832 Displays the result of the diagnostics 001 Diag Result CTL Total Memory Size 7836 Displays the memory capacity of the controller system DF Scan Glass Dust Check Counter 7852 Counts the numbe...

Page 920: ...C CTL 004 PCU Y CTL 005 Development Unit Bk CTL 006 Development Unit M CTL 007 Development Unit C CTL 008 Development Unit Y CTL 009 Developer Bk CTL 010 Developer M CTL 011 Developer C CTL 012 Develo...

Page 921: ...855 002 The setting value B must be set larger than A The total numbers of printouts BW printing plus color printing for each coverage range are displayed with the following SPs Color1 counter SP8601...

Page 922: ...U Y 005 Page Development Unit Bk 006 Page Development Unit M 007 Page Development Unit C 008 Page Development Unit Y 009 Page Developer Bk 010 Page Developer M 011 Page Developer C 012 Page Developer...

Page 923: ...velopment Unit C 038 Rotation Development Unit Y 039 Rotation Developer Bk 040 Rotation Developer M 041 Rotation Developer C 042 Rotation Developer Y 043 Rotation Image Transfer Belt 044 Rotation Clea...

Page 924: ...ation Development Unit M 067 Rotation Development Unit C 068 Rotation Development Unit Y 069 Rotation Developer Bk 070 Rotation Developer M 071 Rotation Developer C 072 Rotation Developer Y 073 Rotati...

Page 925: ...part and Yield count is the recommended yield 091 Page PCU Bk 092 Page PCU M 093 Page PCU C 094 Page PCU Y 095 Page Development Unit Bk 96 Page Development Unit M 97 Page Development Unit C 98 Page De...

Page 926: ...ge Ver 003 Brand ID 004 Area ID 005 Product ID 006 Color ID 007 Maintenance ID 008 New Product Information 009 Recycle Counter 010 Date 011 Serial No 012 Toner Remaining 013 EDP Code 014 End History 0...

Page 927: ...or M 001 Machine Serial ID 002 Cartridge Ver 003 Brand ID 004 Area ID 005 Product ID 006 Color ID 007 Maintenance ID 008 New Product Information 009 Recycle Counter 010 Date 011 Serial No 012 Toner Re...

Page 928: ...le C 7933 Displays the toner bottle information for C 001 Machine Serial ID 002 Cartridge Ver 003 Brand ID 004 Area ID 005 Product ID 006 Color ID 007 Maintenance ID 008 New Product Information 009 Re...

Page 929: ...otal Counter 019 End Color Counter 020 Attachment Date 021 End Date Toner Bottle Y 7934 Displays the toner bottle information for Y 001 Machine Serial ID 002 Cartridge Ver 003 Brand ID 004 Area ID 005...

Page 930: ...chment Date 021 End Date 7935 Toner Bottle Log 1 2 3 4 5 Bk 001 Serial No 002 Attachment Date 003 Attachment Total Counter 004 Refill Information ENG Displays the toner bottle information log 1 for Bk...

Page 931: ...ounter 034 Refill Information ENG Displays the toner bottle information log 4 for Bk 041 Serial No 042 Attachment Date 043 Attachment Total Counter 044 Refill Information ENG Displays the toner bottle...

Page 932: ...2 Attachment Date 023 Attachment Total Counter 024 Refill Information ENG Displays the toner bottle information log 3 for M 031 Serial No 032 Attachment Date 033 Attachment Total Counter 034 Refill In...

Page 933: ...log 1 for C 011 Serial No 012 Attachment Date 013 Attachment Total Counter 014 Refill Information ENG Displays the toner bottle information log 2 for C 021 Serial No 022 Attachment Date 023 Attachmen...

Page 934: ...001 Serial No 002 Attachment Date 003 Attachment Total Counter 004 Refill Information ENG Displays the toner bottle information log 1 for Y 011 Serial No 012 Attachment Date 013 Attachment Total Coun...

Page 935: ...nformation log 4 for Y 041 Serial No 042 Attachment Date 043 Attachment Total Counter 044 Refill Information ENG Displays the toner bottle information log 5 for Y Unit Replacement Date 7950 Displays t...

Page 936: ...03 Page PCU C 004 Page PCU Y 005 Page Development Unit Bk 006 Page Development Unit M 007 Page Development Unit C 008 Page Development Unit Y 009 Page Developer Bk 010 Page Developer M 011 Page Develo...

Page 937: ...036 Rotation Development Unit M 037 Rotation Development Unit C 038 Rotation Development Unit Y 039 Rotation Developer Bk 040 Rotation Developer M 041 Rotation Developer C 042 Rotation Developer Y 043...

Page 938: ...448000 1 mm step 011 Page Image Transfer Belt CTL 0 to 999999 320000 1 sheet step 012 Page Cleaning Unit CTL 0 to 999999 160000 1 sheet step 013 Page Fusing Unit CTL 0 to 999999 160000 1 sheet step 01...

Page 939: ...k 030 Day Threshold Developer M 031 Day Threshold Developer C 032 Day Threshold Developer Y 033 Day Threshold Image Transfer Belt 034 Day Threshold Cleaning Unit 035 Day Threshold Fusing Unit 036 Day...

Page 940: ...o 999999999 0 1 mm step 046 Rotation Developer Bk 047 Rotation Developer M 048 Rotation Developer C 049 Rotation Developer Y 0 to 999999999 0 1 mm step 050 Page PCU Bk 051 Page PCU M 052 Page PCU C 05...

Page 941: ...PCU Bk Displays the PCU rotation distance in each specified operation environment T Temperature C H Relative Humidity 001 T 5 0 H 30 002 T 5 30 H 55 003 T 5 55 H 80 004 T 5 80 H 100 005 5 T 15 0 H 30...

Page 942: ...e Mode D023 D025 8 346 SM Appendix 015 25 T 30 55 H 80 016 25 T 30 80 H 100 017 30 T 0 H 30 018 30 T 30 H 55 019 30 T 55 H 80 020 30 T 80 H 100 Operation Env Log Clear 7954 Clears the operation enviro...

Page 943: ...server SP8 401 to SP8 406 The number of pages printed from the document server SP8 691 to SP8 696 The number of pages sent from the document server Specifically the following questions can be answere...

Page 944: ...server window or from another mode such as from a printer driver or by pressing the Store File button in the Copy mode window Sometimes they include occasions when the user uses a file that is already...

Page 945: ...ack White Bk Black C Cyan ColCr Color Create ColMode Color Mode Comb Combine Comp Compression Deliv Delivery DesApl Designated Application The application Copy Fax Scan Print used to store the job on...

Page 946: ...copier GUI e g border removal adding stamps page numbers etc K Black YMCK LS Local Storage Refers to the document server LSize Large paper Size Mag Magnification MC One color monochrome NRS New Remot...

Page 947: ...r plotter Jam PrtPGS Print Pages R Red Toner Remaining Applies to the wide format model A2 only This machine is under development and currently not available Rez Resolution SC Service Code Error SC co...

Page 948: ...executed by the customer engineer using the SP modes are not counted When using secure printing when a password is required to start the print job the job is counted at the time when either Delete Da...

Page 949: ...x application the F counter increments 8 011 T Jobs LS CTL 8 012 C Jobs LS CTL 8 013 F Jobs LS CTL 8 014 P Jobs LS CTL 8 015 S Jobs LS CTL 8 016 L Jobs LS CTL 8 017 O Jobs LS CTL These SPs count the n...

Page 950: ...that was stored on the document server with a print job that was stored on the document server the C and P counters both increment When a job already on the document server is printed with another app...

Page 951: ...etwork application Desk Top Binder Web Image Monitor etc the L counter increments 8 041 T TX Jobs LS CTL 8 042 C TX Jobs LS CTL 8 043 F TX Jobs LS CTL 8 044 P TX Jobs LS CTL 8 045 S TX Jobs LS CTL 8 0...

Page 952: ...at the operation panel If the send is started from Desk Top Binder or Web Image Monitor for example then the O counter increments T FIN Jobs CTL 0 to 9999999 0 1 8 061 These SPs total the finishing me...

Page 953: ...ing methods for jobs executed by an external application over the network The finishing method is specified by the application 8 06x 1 Sort Number of jobs started in Sort mode When a stored copy job i...

Page 954: ...ages in the job P Jobs PGS CTL 0 to 9999999 0 1 8 074 These SPs count and calculate the number of print jobs by size based on the number of pages in the job S Jobs PGS 0 to 9999999 0 1 8 075 These SPs...

Page 955: ...rinting a fax report counts as a job and increments the F counter SP 8073 Interrupted jobs paper jam etc are counted even though they do not finish If a job is paused and re started it counts as one j...

Page 956: ...tly on a telephone line Note Color fax sending is not available at this time 8 11x 1 B W 8 11x 2 Color These counters count jobs not pages This SP counts fax jobs sent over a telephone line with a fax...

Page 957: ...s not available at this time F IFAX TX Jobs CTL 0 to 9999999 0 1 8 123 These SPs count the number of jobs color or black and white sent not stored on the document server as fax images using I Fax Note...

Page 958: ...is stored on the document server after the job is stored it is determined to be color or black and white then counted If the job is cancelled during scanning or if the job is cancelled while the docu...

Page 959: ...These counters count jobs not pages The jobs are counted even though the arrival and reception of the jobs at the Scan Router server cannot be confirmed If even one color image is mixed with black and...

Page 960: ...s not counted If the job is cancelled while it is waiting to be sent the job is not counted If the job is cancelled during sending it may or may not be counted depending on what stage of the process h...

Page 961: ...t reading user stamp data or reading color charts to adjust color Previews done with a scanner driver are not counted A count is done only after all images of a job have been scanned Scans made in SP...

Page 962: ...er Tools display F LSize Scan PGS CTL 0 to 9999999 0 1 8 203 These SPs count the total number of large pages input with the scanner for fax transmission Note These counters are displayed in the SMC Re...

Page 963: ...reen at the operation panel and with the Store File button from within the Copy mode screen Reading user stamp data is not counted If a job is cancelled the pages output as far as the cancellation are...

Page 964: ...of pages fed for duplex front side scanning The front side is determined by which side the user loads face up 8 221 2 Back Number of rear sides fed for scanning With an ADF that can scan both sides si...

Page 965: ...ctable Originals of non standard size 8 231 5 Platen Book mode Raising the ADF and placing the original directly on the platen If the scan mode is changed during the job for example if the user switch...

Page 966: ...of which application was used C Scan PGS Org CTL 0 to 9999999 0 1 8 242 These SPs count the number of pages scanned by original type for Copy jobs F Scan PGS Org CTL 0 to 9999999 0 1 8 243 These SPs...

Page 967: ...button from within the Copy mode screen 8 241 8 242 8 243 8 245 8 246 8 24x 1 Text Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 8 24x 2 Text Photo Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 8 24x 3 Photo Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 8 24x 4 GenCopy Pale Yes...

Page 968: ...many times Image Edit features have been selected at the operation panel for each application Some examples of these editing features are Erase Border Erase Center Image Repeat Centering Positive Neg...

Page 969: ...count the number of pages scanned using a TWAIN driver These counters reveal how the TWAIN driver is used for delivery functions 0 to 9999999 0 1 Note At the present time these counters perform identi...

Page 970: ...0 1 8 303 These SPs count by size the total number of pages scanned by the Fax application Use these totals to compare original page size scanning and output page size SP 8 443 S Scan PGS Size CTL 0 t...

Page 971: ...SM Appendix 8 375 D023 D025 Appendix SP Mode Tables 8 30x 1 A3 8 30x 2 A4 8 30x 3 A5 8 30x 4 B4 8 30x 5 B5 8 30x 6 DLT 8 30x 7 LG 8 30x 8 LT 8 30x 9 HLT 8 30x 10 Full Bleed 8 30x 254 Other Standard 8...

Page 972: ...count by resolution setting the total number of pages scanned by applications that can specify resolution settings Note At the present time SP8 311 and SP8 315 perform identical counts 8 31x 1 1200dp...

Page 973: ...T page is counted as 2 When several documents are merged for a print job the number of pages stored are counted for the application that stored them These counters are used primarily to calculate char...

Page 974: ...pages is incremented The L counter counts the number of jobs stored from within the document server mode screen at the operation panel 0 to 9999999 0 1 Print jobs done with Web Image Monitor and Desk...

Page 975: ...for printing by the fax application P PrtPGS Dup Comb CTL 0 to 9999999 0 1 8 424 These SPs count by binding and combine and n Up settings the number of pages processed for printing by the printer appl...

Page 976: ...8 42x 9 8 8 pages on 1 side 8 Up 8 42x 10 9 9 pages on 1 side 9 Up 8 42x 11 16 16 pages on 1 side 16 Up 8 42x 12 Booklet 8 42x 13 Magazine These counts SP8 421 to SP8 427 are especially useful for cus...

Page 977: ...System Service Mode SM Appendix 8 381 D023 D025 Appendix SP Mode Tables Booklet Magazine Original Pages Count Original Pages Count 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 3 2 3 2 4 2 4 2 5 3 5 4 6 4 6 4 7 4 7 4 8 4 8 4...

Page 978: ...tion L PrtPGS ImgEdt CTL 0 to 9999999 0 1 8 436 These SPs count the total number of pages output from within the document server mode window at the operation panel with the three features below O PrtP...

Page 979: ...to 9999999 0 1 8 443 These SPs count by print paper size the number of pages printed by the fax application P PrtPGS Ppr Size CTL 0 to 9999999 0 1 8 444 These SPs count by print paper size the number...

Page 980: ...s count by print paper size the number of pages printed by Other applications 8 44x 1 A3 8 44x 2 A4 8 44x 3 A5 8 44x 4 B4 8 44x 5 B5 8 44x 6 DLT 8 44x 7 LG 8 44x 8 LT 8 44x 9 HLT 8 44x 10 Full Bleed 8...

Page 981: ...eets fed from each paper feed station 8 451 1 Bypass Bypass Tray 8 451 2 Tray 1 Copier 8 451 3 Tray 2 Copier 8 451 4 Tray 3 Paper Tray Unit Option 8 451 5 Tray 4 Paper Tray Unit Option 8 451 6 Tray 5...

Page 982: ...put timing Blank sheets covers chapter covers slip sheets are also counted During duplex printing pages printed on both sides count as 1 and a page printed on one side counts as 1 C PrtPGS Ppr Type CT...

Page 983: ...r Type CTL 0 to 9999999 0 1 8 466 These SPs count by paper type the number pages printed from within the document server mode window at the operation panel 8 46x 1 Normal 8 46x 2 Recycled 8 46x 3 Spec...

Page 984: ...stments done with printer drivers with PC applications such as Excel are also counted Magnification adjustments done for adjustments after they have been stored on the document server are not counted...

Page 985: ...These SPs count the number of pages printed in the Color Mode by each application 8 49x 1 B W 8 49x 2 Single Color 8 49x 3 Two Color 8 49x 4 Full Color 8 501 T PrtPGS Col Mode CTL 8 504 P PrtPGS Col M...

Page 986: ...by printer emulation mode the total number of pages printed 8 514 1 RPCS 8 514 2 RPDL 8 514 3 PS3 8 514 4 R98 8 514 5 R16 8 514 6 GL GL2 8 514 7 R55 8 514 8 RTIFF 8 514 9 PDF 8 514 10 PCL5e 5c 8 514...

Page 987: ...finishing mode the total number of pages printed by the Fax application NOTE Print finishing options for received faxes are currently not available P PrtPGS FIN CTL 0 to 9999999 0 1 8 524 These SPs co...

Page 988: ...Punch 8 52x 7 Other If stapling is selected for finishing and the stack is too large for stapling the unstapled pages are still counted The counts for staple finishing are based on output to the stapl...

Page 989: ...Report these counters are also displayed in the User Tools display on the copy machine 8 581 1 Total 8 581 2 Total Full Color 8 581 3 B W Single Color 8 581 4 Development CMY 8 581 5 Development K 8 5...

Page 990: ...8 582 3 Two Color 8 582 4 Full Color 8 583 F Counter CTL 0 to 9999999 0 1 These SPs count the total output of the fax application broken down by color output 8 583 1 B W 8 583 2 Single Color 8 584 P C...

Page 991: ...lor O Counter CTL 0 to 9999999 0 1 8 591 These SPs count the totals for A3 DLT paper use number of duplex pages printed and the number of staples used These totals are for Other O applications only 8...

Page 992: ...2 Color If a document has color and black and white pages mixed the pages are counted separately as B W or Color At the present time this feature is provided for the Fax application only so SP8631 and...

Page 993: ...d for the Fax application only so SP8641 and SP8643 are the same The counts include error pages If a document is sent to more than one destination with a Group transmission the count is done for each...

Page 994: ...unted separately For example if a 10 page document is sent to 200 addresses the count is 10 for the first 100 destinations and the count is also 10 for the second 100 destinations for a total of 20 T...

Page 995: ...n application 8 67x 1 B W 8 67x 2 Color 8 681 T PCFAX TXPGS CTL 8 683 F PCFAX TXPGS CTL These SPs count the number of pages sent by PC Fax These SPs are provided for the Fax application only so the co...

Page 996: ...ile button from within the Copy mode screen go to the C counter Print jobs done with Web Image Monitor and Desk Top Binder are added to the count If several documents are merged for sending the number...

Page 997: ...8 715 These SPs count the number of pages sent by each compression mode 8 715 1 JPEG JPEG2000 8 715 2 TIFF Multi Single 8 715 3 PDF 8 715 4 Other RX PGS Port CTL 0 to 9999999 0 1 8 741 These SPs count...

Page 998: ...These SPs display the number of already replaced toner bottles NOTE Currently the data in SP7 833 011 through 014 and the data in SP8 781 001 through 004 are the same 8 781 1 Toner BK The number of bl...

Page 999: ...market that can only measure in increments of 10 10 steps 8 801 1 K 8 801 2 Y 8 801 3 M 8 801 4 C Coverage Count 0 10 ENG 0 to 9999999 0 1 8 851 These SPs display the number of scanned sheets on which...

Page 1000: ...K 8 861 2 Y 8 861 3 M 8 861 4 C Coverage Count 21 30 ENG 0 to 9999999 0 1 8 871 These SPs display the number of scanned sheets on which the coverage of each color is from 21 to 30 8 871 1 BK 8 871 2 Y...

Page 1001: ...color 8 891 1 BK 8 891 2 Y 8 891 3 M 8 891 4 C Printing PGS Log Latest 1 ENG 0 to 9999999 0 1 8 901 These SPs display the amount of the remaining previous toner for each color 8 901 1 BK 8 901 2 Y 8...

Page 1002: ...achine spends in each operation mode These SPs are useful for customers who need to investigate machine operation for improvement in their compliance with ISO Standards 8 941 1 Operation Time Engine o...

Page 1003: ...tal time when paper jams have been staying during printing 8 941 8 OrgJam Total time when original jams have been staying during scanning 8 941 9 Supply PM Unit End Total time when toner end has been...

Page 1004: ...ations with the Program job settings feature 8 951 10 Scanner Program Scanner application registrations with the Program job settings feature 0 to 255 0 255 Adomin Counter List CTL 0 to 9999999 0 1 8...

Page 1005: ...2 A3 DLT 8 999 13 Duplex 8 999 14 Coverage Color 8 999 15 Coverage BW 8 999 16 Coverage Color Print Page 8 999 17 Coverage BW Print Page 8 999 101 Transmission Total Color 8 999 102 Transmission Total...

Page 1006: ...h This SP is referred when the input voltage of the IH inverter is more than 93 adjustable with SP1 916 026 Normal Threshold Lower Limit ENG 0 to 200 120 1 deg step 002 Specifies the threshold tempera...

Page 1007: ...f the pressure roller between L low and M middle This SP is referred when the input voltage of the IH inverter is 93 or less adjustable with SP1 916 026 Mid Thick A3 Threshold Upper Limit ENG 0 to 200...

Page 1008: ...s machine 0 to 9999999 0 1 Repeat Print Temp Correction 9965 These SPs are used for Preventing the fusing temperature overheating due to a multiple printing job JOB Interval Plain ENG 0 to 120 30 1 se...

Page 1009: ...the offset temperature for the plain paper in the low temperature The machine decreases this temperature when a job continues for 600 seconds adjustable with SP9 965 003 and the environment temperatur...

Page 1010: ...wing this table 5803 2 1st Tray Set Detection Set Not set 5803 3 1st Tray Paper Height Sensor1 See table 1 following this table 5803 4 1st Tray Paper Height Sensor2 See table 1 following this table 58...

Page 1011: ...803 15 2st Paper Feed Sensor Paper detected Paper not detected 5803 16 Exit Sensor Paper detected Paper not detected 5803 17 Tray Full Exit Sensor Paper not full Paper full 5803 18 Fusing Exit Sensor...

Page 1012: ...Sensor C Toner end Toner remaining 5803 33 Toner End Sensor Y Toner end Toner remaining 5803 34 Drum Phase Sensor Bk Actuator not detected Actuator detected 5803 35 Drum Phase Sensor M Actuator not d...

Page 1013: ...5803 53 2nd Duct Fan Lock Normal Lock 5803 54 3rd Duct Fan Lock Normal Lock 5803 55 Paper Exit Fan Lock Normal 5803 56 Fusing Coil Fan Lock Normal 5803 57 IH Power Supply Cooling Fan Lock Normal Lock...

Page 1014: ...5803 83 Fusing Destination Detection DOM Set Not set 5803 84 Fusing Destination Detection NA Set Not set 5803 85 Fusing Destination Detection EU Set Not set 5803 86 Fusing Destination Detection TWN Se...

Page 1015: ...Tables Reading 5803 Description 0 1 5803 101 Mechanical Counter Bk Set Set Not set 5803 102 Mechanical Counter FC Set Set Not set 5803 103 Key Counter Set Set Not set 5803 110 IOB Version 5803 200 Sca...

Page 1016: ...t detected Paper detected 6007 4 Original Width 1 Paper not detected Paper detected 6007 5 Original Width 2 Paper not detected Paper detected 6007 6 Original Width 3 Paper not detected Paper detected...

Page 1017: ...421 D023 D025 Appendix SP Mode Tables Reading 6007 Description 0 1 6007 14 Exit Sensor Paper not detected Paper detected 6007 15 Feed Cover Sensor ADF cover close ADF cover open 6007 16 Lift Up Senso...

Page 1018: ...Out HP Sensor Home position Not home position 6138 5 Jogger HP Sensor Jogger Fence HP Sensor Not home position Home position 6138 6 Staple Tray Paper Sensor Staple Tray Paper Sensor Paper not detected...

Page 1019: ...hift Tray Paper Sensor Shift Tray Paper Position Sensor Shift tray not detected Shift tray detected 6138 17 Shift Tray Full Full Nor full 6138 18 Shift Roller HP Sensor Not home position Home position...

Page 1020: ...138 32 Driver HP Sensor Home position Not home position 6138 33 Punch Registration Detection HP Sensor Not home position Home position 6138 34 Punch Moving HP Sensor Punch Movement HP Sensor Not home...

Page 1021: ...ng HP Sensor Stapler HP Sensor Not home position Home position 6139 5 Jogger HP Sensor Jogger Fence HP Sensor Not home position Home position 6139 6 Stack Feed out Belt HP Sensor Home position Not hom...

Page 1022: ...12 Shift HP Sensor Not home position Home position 6139 13 Paper Sensor Stack Height Sensor Output tray not detected Output tray detected 6139 14 Tray Lower Sensor Lower Tray Lower Limit Sensor Lower...

Page 1023: ...ion Not home position 6145 4 Rear Jogger HP Sensor Rear Jogger Fence HP Sensor Home position Not home position 6145 5 Staple Tray Paper Sensor Paper detected Paper not detected 6145 6 Staple Moving HP...

Page 1024: ...ed 6150 2 Bridge Feed Sensor Paper detected Paper not detected 6150 3 Bridge Set Sensor Set Not Set 6150 4 Bridge Exit Cover Detection Closed Open 6150 5 Bridge Feed Cover Detection Closed Open Intern...

Page 1025: ...Service Mode SM Appendix 8 429 D023 D025 Appendix SP Mode Tables 1 Bin Tray D414 Reading 6154 Description 0 1 6154 1 1 bin Set Sensor Set Not Set 6154 2 1 bin Paper Sensor Paper detected Paper not de...

Page 1026: ...t detected Paper detected 6160 3 Bank Tray5 Feed Sensor Paper not detected Paper detected 6160 4 Bank Tray3 Relay Sensor Paper not detected Paper detected 6160 5 Bank Tray4 Relay Sensor Paper not dete...

Page 1027: ...8 431 D023 D025 Appendix SP Mode Tables Table 1 Paper Height Sensor 0 Deactivated 1 Activated actuator inside sensor Remaining paper Paper height sensor 1 Paper height sensor 2 Full 0 0 Nearly full 1...

Page 1028: ...11 SEF 1 1 1 B5 SEF B5 SEF 0 1 1 11 x 81 2 LEF 3 A4 LEF A4 LEF 3 11 x 81 2 LEF 1 0 0 10 5 x 7 25 LEF 4 B5 LEF B5 LEF 4 10 5 x 7 25 LEF 0 1 0 A5 LEF A5 LEF 1 0 1 1 The machine detects either 11 x 17 SE...

Page 1029: ...U ASIA 1 1 1 1 1 HLT SEF A6 SEF 0 1 1 1 1 HLT SEF A6 SEF 0 0 1 1 1 HLT SEF A5 SEF 1 0 1 1 1 HLT SEF A5 SEF 1 0 0 1 0 LT LG SEF 1 A4 SEF 1 0 0 1 1 LT LG SEF 1 A5 LEF 1 1 0 1 0 LT LG SEF 1 A4 SEF 1 1 0...

Page 1030: ...L1 W1 W2 SP4 301 display A3 11 x 17 O O O O O 00011111 B4 10 x 14 O O O O X 00011110 F4 8 5 x 13 8 25 x 13 or 8 x 13 SP 5126 controls the size that is detected 8 5 x 14 O O O X X 00011100 A4 LEF 8 5 x...

Page 1031: ...otor K 77mm s Drum Development Drive Motor M 77 mm s 5804 10 Drum Dev Motor M 230mm s Drum Development Drive Motor C 230 mm s 5804 11 Drum Dev Motor M 205mm s Drum Development Drive Motor Y 205 mm s 5...

Page 1032: ...xit Motor 230 mm s 5804 32 Fusing Exit Motor 205mm s Fusing Paper Exit Motor 205 mm s 5804 33 Fusing Exit Motor 154mm s Fusing Paper Exit Motor 154 mm s 5804 35 Fusing Exit Motor 77mm s Fusing Paper E...

Page 1033: ...or 230mm s Registration Motor 230 mm s 5804 61 Regist Motor 205mm s Registration Motor 205 mm s 5804 62 Regist Motor 154mm s Registration Motor 154 mm s 5804 64 Regist Motor 77mm s Registration Motor...

Page 1034: ...x Reverse M CCW 230mm s Duplex Inverter Motor CCW 230 mm s 5804 89 Duplex Reverse M CCW 205mm s Duplex Inverter Motor CCW 205 mm s 5804 90 Duplex Reverse Motor CCW 154mm s Duplex Inverter Motor CCW 15...

Page 1035: ...804 113 Fusing Fan L Fusing Fan Low Speed 5804 114 PSU Cooling Fan PSU Fan 1 High Speed 5804 115 2nd Duct Fan H Duct Fan 2 High Speed 5804 116 2nd Duct Fan L Duct Fan 2 Low Speed 5804 117 3rd Duct Fan...

Page 1036: ...Toner Supply Clutch M 5804 136 Toner Supply Pump C Toner Supply Clutch C 5804 137 Toner Supply Pump Y Toner Supply Clutch Y 5804 138 1st Paper Feed Clutch Paper Feed Clutch 1 5804 139 2st Paper Feed...

Page 1037: ...TD Sensor C 5804 168 HST Sensor C TD Sensor Y 5804 169 HST Sensor Y Toner End Sensor Bk 5804 170 Toner End Sensor Bk Toner End Sensor M 5804 171 Toner End Sensor M Toner End Sensor C 5804 172 Toner E...

Page 1038: ...tor 2 205 mm s Optional Paper Feed Unit 5804 183 Bank Motor 2 205mm s Paper Feed Motor 2 215 mm s Optional Paper Feed Unit 5804 184 Bank Motor 2 215mm s Paper Feed Motor 2 215 mm s Optional Paper Feed...

Page 1039: ...804 219 LD2 M 5804 220 LD1 C 5804 221 LD2 C 5804 222 LD1 Y 5804 223 LD2 Y 5804 224 PP 1TB K PP Image Transfer Roller K 5804 225 PP 1TB M PP Image Transfer Roller M 5804 226 PP 1TB C PP Image Transfer...

Page 1040: ...Charge AC K 205mm s 5804 239 HVPS ChargeAC K 154mm s 5804 241 HVPS ChargeAC K 77mm s 5804 244 PP Charge AC M 230mm s 5804 245 PP Charge AC M 205mm s 5804 246 HVPS ChargeAC M 154mm s 5804 248 HVPS Char...

Page 1041: ...otor Forward rotation 6008 4 Feed Motor Reverse Feed Motor Reverse rotation 6008 5 Relay Motor Forward Transport Motor Forward rotation 6008 7 Relay Motor Reverse Transport Motor Forward rotation 6008...

Page 1042: ...Rotation Motor Fold Roller Motor 6143 8 Staple Motor Staple Fold Motor 6143 10 Exit Guide Plate Motor 6143 11 Shift Relay Motor Upper Transport Motor 6143 12 Tray Motor Shift Tray Motor 6143 13 Stack...

Page 1043: ...1 Relay Up Motor Upper Transport Motor 6144 2 Relay Down Motor Lower Transport Motor 6144 3 Exit Motor 6144 4 Proof Junction Gate SOL Tray Junction Gate Solenoid 6144 5 Tray Up Motor Lower Tray Lift...

Page 1044: ...roll Motor Positioning Roller Arm Motor 6146 3 Front Jogger Motor Front Fence Motor 6146 4 Rear Jogger Motor Rear Fence Motor 6146 5 Staple Moving Motor Stapler Movement Motor 6146 6 Stack Feed out Mo...

Page 1045: ...d Motor Enable Bridge Feed Motor Enable 6151 4 Bridge Feed Motor 230mm s Bridge Feed Motor 230mm s 6151 5 Bridge Feed Motor 205mm s Bridge Feed Motor 205mm s 6151 7 Bridge Feed Motor 154mm s Bridge Fe...

Page 1046: ...61 12 Bank1 Feed Motor 115mm s Feed Motor 115mm s D351 D352 6161 13 Bank1 Feed Motor 77mm s Feed Motor 77mm s D351 D352 6161 15 Bank2 Feed Motor 300mm s Feed Motor 300mm s D353 6161 16 Bank2 Feed Moto...

Page 1047: ...id Pick up Solenoid D351 D352 or D387 6161 31 Bank Tray4 PU Solenoid Pick up Solenoid D351 D353 6161 32 Bank Tray5 PU Solenoid Pick up Solenoid D353 6161 35 Bank Tray3 Feed Clutch Pick up Solenoid D35...

Page 1048: ...an 4 When you want to change the density of printing a test pattern select the density with SP2 109 006 to 009 for each color If you select 0 with SP2 109 006 to 009 the color to be adjusted to 0 does...

Page 1049: ...n Horizontal 15 Cross stitch sub scan 4 2 dot line pattern Horizontal 16 Cross stitch main scan 5 1 dot grid pattern Vertical 17 Belt pattern Horizontal 6 1 dot grid pattern Horizontal 18 Belt pattern...

Page 1050: ...setting will have no effect I O Timeouts will never occur SD Card Save Mode 0 Disable 1 Enable bit 4 Enable Print jobs will be saved to an SD Card in the GW SD slot Card Save Function in the System Ma...

Page 1051: ...ll be applied to all jobs that do not already have a Collate Type configured If 5 0 is enabled this Bit Switch has no effect PCL5e c PS PDL Auto Switching 0 Enable 1 Disable bit 3 Disable The MFPs abi...

Page 1052: ...c Legacy HP compatibility 0 Disable 1 Enable bit 2 Enable Uses the same left margin as older HP models such as HP4000 HP8000 In other words the left margin defined in the job usually ESC r0A will be c...

Page 1053: ...appear under User Tools Printer Features System bit 1 DFU bit 2 DFU PS PS Criteria Pattern3 Pattern1 bit 3 Change the number of PS criterion used by the PS interpreter to determine whether a job is P...

Page 1054: ...code will be printed even if usercode authentication is enabled Color jobs will not be printed without a valid user code bit 4 DFU bit 5 DFU PS Orientation Auto Detect Function Enable Disable bit 6 Di...

Page 1055: ...ints the service summary sheet a summary of all the controller settings 1005 Display Version Disp Version 1005 1 Displays the version of the controller firmware 1006 Sample Locked Print CTL 0 Linked 1...

Page 1056: ...1 Factory 1101 2 Previous 1101 3 Current 1101 4 ACC CTL Resolution Setting 1102 Selects the printing mode resolution for the printer gamma adjustment 1102 1 2400x600 Photo 1800x600 Photo 600 x 600 Ph...

Page 1057: ...1104 1 Black Highlight 1104 2 Black Shadow 1104 3 Black Middle 1104 4 Black IDmax 1104 21 Cyan Highlight 1104 22 Cyan Shadow 1104 23 Cyan Middle 1104 24 Cyan IDmax 1104 41 Magenta Highlight 1104 42 Ma...

Page 1058: ...em as the current setting Before the machine stores the new current setting it moves the data currently stored as the current setting to the previous setting memory storage location 1105 1 Save Tone C...

Page 1059: ...chine has scanned the edge of the original create a margin This SP is activated only when the machine uses TWAIN scanning 1005 1 Range from 0 to 5 mm CTL 0 to 5 0 1 mm step 1009 Remote scan disable CT...

Page 1060: ...ttings that can be selected at the operation panel 2021 1 Level 3 Middle Image Quality 5 to 95 40 1 step 2021 2 Level 2 High Image Quality 5 to 95 50 1 step 2021 3 Level 4 Low Image Quality 5 to 95 30...

Page 1061: ...1000 SHEET FINISHER B408 1000 SHEET FINISHER SR790 REVISION HISTORY Page Date Added Updated New None...

Page 1062: ...4 5 STACK FEED OUT MOTOR 7 2 TROUBLESHOOTING 8 2 1 JAM DETECTION 8 3 SERVICE TABLES 9 3 1 DIP SWITCH SETTINGS 9 4 DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS 10 4 1 GENERAL LAYOUT 10 4 2 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT 11 4 3...

Page 1063: ......

Page 1064: ...rn off the main power switch and unplug the machine before beginning any of the procedures in this section NOTE This manual uses the following symbols See or Refer to Screws Connector Clip ring E ring...

Page 1065: ...t guide plate B 3 Upper side cover C x 2 4 Front cover support plate D x 1 5 Front cover E 6 Front inner cover F x 2 7 Harness G 8 Unhook the spring H 9 Turn the stapler unit I and take it out 10 Brac...

Page 1066: ...00 Sheet Finisher B408 MOTORS SM 3 B408 1 3 MOTORS 1 3 1 SHIFT MOTOR 1 Rear cover 1 1 2 Shift motor A x 2 x 1 1 3 2 STAPLER MOTOR 1 Rear cover 1 1 2 Stapler motor A x 2 x 1 B408R123 WMF B408R124 WMF A...

Page 1067: ...NSPORT MOTOR AND EXIT MOTOR 1 Rear cover 1 1 2 Motor assembly A x 4 x 2 3 Upper transport motor B x 4 4 Exit motor C x 4 1 3 4 LOWER TRANSPORT MOTOR 1 Main PCB 1 1 2 Lower transport motor A x 2 x 1 B4...

Page 1068: ...AND SENSORS 1 4 1 PREPARATION 1 Front cover and inner cover 1 2 2 Upper side cover A x 2 3 Upper tray B x 1 4 Lower side cover C x 2 5 Loosen the 2 screws D 6 Lower the lower tray guide plate E 7 Guid...

Page 1069: ...D SENSORS B408 6 SM 1 4 2 STACK HEIGHT SENSOR 1 Stack height sensor assembly A x 1 2 Stack height sensor B x 1 1 4 3 STAPLER TRAY PAPER SENSOR 1 Stapler tray paper sensor A x 1 B408R121 WMF B408R120 W...

Page 1070: ...0 Sheet Finisher B408 MOTORS AND SENSORS SM 7 B408 1 4 4 LOWER TRAY LIFT MOTOR 1 Lower tray lift motor A x 2 x 1 1 4 5 STACK FEED OUT MOTOR 1 Stack feed out motor A x 2 x 1 B408R119 WMF B408R122 WMF A...

Page 1071: ...off Tray exit sensor Off check The tray exit sensor does not turn off within the normal time after it turns on Stapler tray entrance sensor On check The stapler tray entrance sensor does not switch on...

Page 1072: ...he table below SW100 1 2 Description 0 0 Normal operation mode Default 1 0 Packing mode Before packing the machine do the following Set switch 1 to 1 then back to zero The lower tray moves to the lowe...

Page 1073: ...er Tray Exit Roller 3 Entrance Roller 4 Tray Junction Gate 5 Upper Transport Roller 6 Stapler Junction Gate 7 Lower Transport Rollers 8 Stapler 9 Stack Feed out Belt 10 Positioning Roller 11 Shift Rol...

Page 1074: ...ght Sensor 8 Lower Tray Exit Sensor 9 Lower Tray Upper Limit Switch 10 Shift HP Sensor 11 Shift Motor 12 Jogger Fence HP Sensor 13 Positioning Roller Solenoid 14 Stapler HP Sensor 15 Stapler Tray Entr...

Page 1075: ...ower Tray Lift Motor 24 Lower Tray Lower Limit Sensor 25 Stapler Motor 26 Jogger Fence Motor 27 Stack Feed out Motor 28 Main Board 29 Lower Transport Motor 30 Stapler Junction Gate Solenoid 31 Exit Mo...

Page 1076: ...S3 Jogger Fence HP Detects when the jogger fence is at home position 12 S4 Shift HP Detects when the shift roller is at home position 10 S5 Stack Feed out Belt HP Detects when the stack feed out belt...

Page 1077: ...ler 13 Switches SW1 Lower Tray Upper Limit Detects when the lower tray is at its upper limit position 9 SW2 Front Door Safety Cuts the dc power when the front door is opened 6 SW3 Upper Cover Cuts the...

Page 1078: ...4 DRIVE LAYOUT 1 Exit Motor 2 Upper Transport Motor 3 Lower Transport Motor 4 Shift Motor 5 Exit Guide Plate Motor 6 Lower Tray Lift Motor 7 Stack Feed out Motor 8 Jogger Motor 9 Stapler Motor B408D1...

Page 1079: ...e solenoid C and stapler junction gate solenoid D Upper Tray Mode The tray junction gate solenoid remains off The copies go up to the upper tray Sort Stack Mode The tray junction gate solenoid turns o...

Page 1080: ...Sheet Finisher B408 UPPER TRAY SM 17 B408 4 6 UPPER TRAY When the paper limit sensor A switches on during feed out for each of three consecutive sheets of paper paper overflow is detected B408D109 WM...

Page 1081: ...removed the stack height sensor F turns off and the tray lifts up Then the tray stops when the sensor turns on again the tray pushes up the feeler If the stack height sensor fails the lower tray upper...

Page 1082: ...r transport roller the shift motor turns on driving the shift gear disk and the link D After the paper is delivered to the lower tray E the shift roller moves to its home position which is detected by...

Page 1083: ...oning roller C pushes the copy against the bottom of the stack stopper D For the horizontal paper alignment the jogger front fence E and the rear fence F move to the waiting position which is 18 mm aw...

Page 1084: ...ate A is moved up to make a gap between the exit rollers This operation is done for all paper sizes but is only needed for the larger sizes The exit guide plate motor B and exit roller release cam C c...

Page 1085: ...or no staples in the staple cartridge staple end is indicated on the operation panel The stapler sensor C detects this The stapler rotation HP sensor D checks whether the staple hammer mechanism retur...

Page 1086: ...m its home position to the stapling position If two staple position mode is selected the stapler moves to the front stapling position first then moves to the rear stapling position However for the nex...

Page 1087: ...to the shift roller The shift roller takes over stack feed out after the leading edge reaches this roller Just before the stapled stack passes through the lower tray exit sensor the stack feed out mot...

Page 1088: ...BOOKLET FINISHER B793 BOOKLET FINISHER SR3000 REVISION HISTORY Page Date Added Updated New None...

Page 1089: ......

Page 1090: ...ENSOR 7 1 2 6 STAPLE TRAY PAPER SENSOR 8 1 2 7 SHIFT TRAY MOTOR 8 1 2 8 ENTRANCE MOTOR 9 1 2 9 UPPER TRANSPORT MOTOR 9 1 2 10 LOWER TRANSPORT MOTOR 10 1 2 11 SHIFT MOTOR 11 1 3 FOLDER 12 1 3 1 STAPLE...

Page 1091: ...BOOKLET STAPLING 49 2 9 1 OVERVIEW 49 2 9 2 8 5 X 14 LEGAL OR SHORTER 49 2 9 3 LONGER THAN 8 5 X 14 INCHES 50 2 10 MOVING THE STACK TO THE FOLDING POSITION 52 2 11 FOLDER 53 2 11 1 OVERVIEW 53 2 11 2...

Page 1092: ...r switch and unplug the machine before beginning any of the replacement procedures in this manual When taking apart the bridge unit first take the unit out of the copier Symbols Used in this Manual Th...

Page 1093: ......

Page 1094: ...Covers SM 1 B793 B793 Booklet Finisher 1 REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT 1 1 COVERS 1 1 1 FRONT INNER REAR COVERS 1 Remove the front cover A x 1 2 Remove the inner cover B x 2...

Page 1095: ...Covers B793 2 SM 3 Remove the rear cover C x 2 1 1 2 UPPER COVERS 1 Remove the upper cover A x 1 2 Remove the proof tray B x 4...

Page 1096: ...Covers SM 3 B793 B793 Booklet Finisher 3 Remove the upper left cover C...

Page 1097: ...Y 1 2 1 POSITIONING ROLLER 1 Open the front cover 2 Remove the positioning roller A x 1 1 2 2 SHIFT TRAY POSITION SENSOR UPPER LIMIT SWITCH 1 Remove the following items Front Cover Inner Cover Rear Co...

Page 1098: ...he lower guide unit A x 4 x 2 3 Remove the shift tray position sensor B x 1 4 Remove the upper limit switch C x 2 Pull it out from the assembly 1 2 3 PROOF TRAY EXIT FULL SENSOR 1 Remove the front cov...

Page 1099: ...e vertical transport guide A x 4 4 Remove the exit sensor B x 1 5 Remove the tray full sensor C x 1 1 2 4 FINISHER ENTRANCE SENSOR 1 Remove the finisher entrance sensor with bracket A x 1 2 Remove the...

Page 1100: ...Main Body SM 7 B793 B793 Booklet Finisher 1 2 5 SHIFT TRAY EXIT SENSOR 1 Remove the front cover and upper left cover 2 Remove the link A x 1 3 Remove the exit guide unit B 4 Remove the sensor C x 1...

Page 1101: ...PLE TRAY PAPER SENSOR 1 Open the front cover 2 Pull out the staple fold unit 3 Remove the staple tray paper sensor A x 1 1 2 7 SHIFT TRAY MOTOR 1 Remove the rear cover 2 Open the front cover and then...

Page 1102: ...isher 3 Remove the two gears A B 4 Remove the shift tray motor C x 2 x 1 1 2 8 ENTRANCE MOTOR 1 Remove the rear cover 2 Release the belt tension A 3 Remove the entrance motor B x 2 x 1 1 2 9 UPPER TRA...

Page 1103: ...793 10 SM 2 Release the belt tension A 3 Remove the upper transport motor B x 2 x 1 1 2 10 LOWER TRANSPORT MOTOR 1 Remove the rear cover 2 Release the belt tension A 3 Remove the lower transport motor...

Page 1104: ...Main Body SM 11 B793 B793 Booklet Finisher 1 2 11 SHIFT MOTOR 1 Remove the rear cover 2 Remove the shift motor with bracket A x 1 x 4 3 Remove the shift motor B x 1...

Page 1105: ...Folder B793 12 SM 1 3 FOLDER 1 3 1 STAPLE FOLDER UNIT 1 Remove the rear cover 2 Disconnect all connectors and release the harness A for the staple folder unit x 1 x 3 3 Open the front cover...

Page 1106: ...93 B793 Booklet Finisher 4 Pull out and remove the staple folder unit B x 2 1 3 2 FOLDER UNIT 1 Remove the staple folder unit 2 Remove the knobs A x 1 each 3 Disconnect the connectors 4 Remove the fol...

Page 1107: ...der B793 14 SM 1 3 3 FOLDER UNIT EXIT SENSOR 1 Remove the folder unit 2 Remove the folder unit upper cover A x 1 3 Remove the lower clamp roller unit B x 4 4 Remove the folder unit exit sensor C x 1 x...

Page 1108: ...ANCE SENSOR 1 Open the front cover 2 Pull out the staple folder unit 3 Remove the exit cover A x 2 4 Remove the entrance sensor B x 1 x 1 1 3 5 STAPLER UNIT 1 Remove the rear cover 2 Disconnect the co...

Page 1109: ...Folder B793 16 SM 4 Open the front cover and pull out the staple folder unit 4 5 Disconnect the connectors and release the harness 4 connectors 5 1 clamp 6...

Page 1110: ...Folder SM 17 B793 B793 Booklet Finisher 6 Remove a connector 7 7 Remove 2 screws 8...

Page 1111: ...Folder B793 18 SM 8 Remove the staple tray 9 9 Remove the guide 10 2 screws...

Page 1112: ...Folder SM 19 B793 B793 Booklet Finisher 10 Move the stapler unit until its screw come to the hole 11 on the stay 11 Remove the screw 12 that holds the front of the guide plate 13...

Page 1113: ...Folder B793 20 SM 12 Remove the screw 14 that holds the rear of the guide plate Remove the rear side screw through the hole in the stay...

Page 1114: ...Folder SM 21 B793 B793 Booklet Finisher 13 Remove the guide plate 13 14 Remove the staple folding unit 15 3 screws 2 connectors...

Page 1115: ...Folder B793 22 SM 15 Remove the staple cartridge 16 16 Remove the stapler unit cover 17 17 Remove the stapler drive unit 18...

Page 1116: ...Folder SM 23 B793 B793 Booklet Finisher Reassembly 1 Mount the stapler drive unit 1 2 Mount the staple folder unit 2 Do not tighten the screws 3 at this time...

Page 1117: ...Folder B793 24 SM 3 Set the special tool in the long hole 4 on both units 4 Secure the special tool 5 with the knob 6...

Page 1118: ...Folder SM 25 B793 B793 Booklet Finisher 5 Tighten the screws 7 for the stapler folder unit 6 Reassemble the machine...

Page 1119: ...Others B793 26 SM 1 4 OTHERS 1 4 1 MAIN BOARD 1 Remove the rear cover 2 Remove the main board A x 5...

Page 1120: ...tion No Function 1 ON 0 2 mm 2 ON 0 4 mm 3 ON 0 8 mm 4 Direction OFF Towards the trailing edge ON Towards the leading edge SW102 Move the tray position No Function 1 OFF ON OFF Turn the switch from of...

Page 1121: ...MPONENT LAYOUT 1 Proof Tray 2 Shift Tray 3 Exit Guide Plate 4 Stack Feed Out Belt 5 Staple Unit 6 Booklet Tray 7 Proof Tray Exit Roller 8 Proof Tray Junction Gate 9 Punch Unit 10 Staple Tray Junction...

Page 1122: ...Component Layout SM 29 B793 B793 Booklet Finisher Drive Layout 1 Upper Transport Motor 2 Entrance Motor 3 Lower Transport Motor 4 Fold Plate Motor 5 Fold Roller Motor 6 Stack Feed out Motor...

Page 1123: ...xit Guide Plate Motor 3 Shift Tray Exit Sensor 4 Upper Limit Switch 5 Shift Tray Position Sensor 6 Rear Booklet Tray Full Sensor 7 Front Booklet Tray Full Sensor 8 Proof Tray Full Sensor 9 Exit Guide...

Page 1124: ...y Gate Solenoid 14 Lower Transport Motor 15 Entrance Motor 16 Positioning Roller Solenoid 17 Main Board 18 Shift Tray Motor 19 Lower Limit Sensor 20 Upper Cover Sensor 21 Staple Tray Gate Solenoid 22...

Page 1125: ...Exit Sensor 39 Lower Clamp Roller HP Sensor 40 Lower Retraction Motor 41 Fold Unit Entrance Sensor 42 Bottom Fence HP Sensor 43 Fold Cam HP Sensor 44 Fold Roller Motor 45 Fold Plate HP Sensor 46 Fold...

Page 1126: ...48 Punch Motor 49 Punch Encoder Sensor 50 Punch HP Sensor 51 Punch Board 52 Paper Position Sensor Slide Motor 53 Paper Position Slide HP Sensor 54 Paper Position Sensor 55 Punch Movement HP Sensor 56...

Page 1127: ...etermine when the booklet tray is full Front Booklet Tray Full Sensor 7 One of two sensors that the machine uses to determine when the booklet tray is full Proof Tray Full Sensor 8 Detects when the pr...

Page 1128: ...feeds out correctly Lower Clamp Roller HP Sensor 39 Detects when the lower clamp roller is at home position Fold Unit Entrance Sensor 41 Detects 1 the leading edge of the stack during booklet staplin...

Page 1129: ...e Plate Motor 2 Controls the exit guide plate mechanism Lower Transport Motor 14 Controls the positioning roller and other rollers in the finisher see Drive Layout for details Entrance Motor 15 Contro...

Page 1130: ...the fold rollers Fold Roller Motor 44 Controls the rollers that fold the paper Fold Plate Motor 46 Controls the plate that makes the fold in the paper Bottom Fence Lift Motor 47 Raises the bottom fen...

Page 1131: ...m No Purpose Front Door Safety Switch 11 Cuts dc power when the front door is opened Others Item No Purpose Staple Driver Unit 31 Pushes the staples into the paper Staple Folder Unit 32 Folds the ends...

Page 1132: ...ES Two junction gates control the path of paper Each junction gate is controlled by a solenoid Junction gate operation is summarized in the following table Mode Proof Shift Staple Paper Path Proof Tra...

Page 1133: ...ray Gate Solenoid Roller Drive Proof Tray Exit Roller B Proof Tray Transport Roller C Controlled by the Upper Transport Motor Entrance Roller D Transport Roller E Controlled by the Entrance Motor Jam...

Page 1134: ...he tray moves up too far and cuts power to the shift tray motor The shift tray position sensor C checks when the tray or the top of the stack is at the correct height to receive paper Shift Mode This...

Page 1135: ...The shift motor HP sensor C detects when the mechanism is at home position The upper transport motor rotates the shift roller When shift mode is used the shift motor turns on after each page is fed o...

Page 1136: ...b stops until booklets are removed from the tray If the booklet tray is not installed this is detected if the front and rear sensors remain OFF the machine will not operate in the booklet staple and f...

Page 1137: ...l sensors every feed out of a paper stack The machine checks a certain condition based on the size of the paper and the number of sheets in the booklet Two examples are shown below the table Tell the...

Page 1138: ...or the Full 1 condition If the Full 1 condition occurs 15 times 15 Cnt in the table above the machine detects that the tray is full After the copier makes a booklet with 5 sheets of A4 LT paper the ma...

Page 1139: ...r C onto the top of the sheet Then the lower transport motor turns on and the positioning roller rotates to push the sheet of paper against the stopper there are two stoppers stopper L or stopper S th...

Page 1140: ...prevent the paper running into the exit roller during stacking The exit guide plate motor B drives the exit guide plate The exit guide plate HP sensor C detects when the guide plate is at home positi...

Page 1141: ...he stapler moves to a starting position that depends on the paper size as follows 8 5 x 14 inches or shorter Rear side staple position Longer than 8 5 x 14 inches Center position When the stapler is a...

Page 1142: ...8 5 x 14 inches Stopper L is used for paper that is longer than 8 5 x 14 inches In corner stapling mode the pawl on the stack feed out belt holds the stack of paper For booklet stapling this pawl sta...

Page 1143: ...o this the upper clamp roller motor E rotates the upper clamp roller 2 9 3 LONGER THAN 8 5 X 14 INCHES At the start of the set the stapler moves to the center position At this position a bracket A on...

Page 1144: ...Stapling SM 51 B793 B793 Booklet Finisher previous section When the stack is complete the stapler moves to the rear side position and stopper L moves away The machine feeds the stack to the correct p...

Page 1145: ...he leading edge of the stack reaches the bottom fence B this fence consists of two pawls that catch the paper The bottom fence moves the stack to the folding position The fold roller motor C turns the...

Page 1146: ...PLATE A Bottom Fence Stack Stoppers Catches the stack after it is released by the clamp rollers B Fold Plate Motor Drives the timing belt and gears that move the fold plate C Fold Plate Cam Controls...

Page 1147: ...to feed out the folded stack This cycle can be repeated by changing the setting of SP6136 G Fold Rollers Driven by the fold roller motor this roller pair feeds out the stack at its fold reverses to fe...

Page 1148: ...ate This buckles the paper against the finisher entrance roller to correct skew The finisher entrance roller starts to rotate again and feeds the sheet into the finisher These SP codes adjust the skew...

Page 1149: ...he detected position of the paper edge to calculate the correct position for punching The upper transport motor switches on and rotates the feed rollers C the prescribed distance to put the paper unde...

Page 1150: ...POSITION DETECTION The paper position sensor slide motor A extends and retracts the paper position slide that holds the paper position sensor B The paper position sensor detects the position of the p...

Page 1151: ...cts the position when it retracts switches off the punch movement motor and stops the punch unit at its home position The punch drive motor C fires the punches that punch holes in the paper below 2 12...

Page 1152: ...hole punching This is the 1 position in the diagrams the first diagram is for 2 hole punching and the second diagram is for 3 hole punching Then the punch drive motor turns counter clockwise to the 2...

Page 1153: ...0 SM The punch hopper full sensor B does the following Signals that the hopper is full when it detects the top of the stack of punchouts that have collected in the hopper Detects when the punch hopper...

Page 1154: ...PAPER FEED UNIT PB3040 D351 D351 PAPER FEED UNIT PB3040 Page Date Added Updated New None...

Page 1155: ......

Page 1156: ...1 4 LIFT PAPER END AND RELAY SENSORS 5 1 5 PAPER FEED UNIT 6 1 6 PICK UP PAPER FEED AND SEPARATION ROLLERS 7 2 DETAILS 8 2 1 COMPONENT LAYOUT 8 2 1 1 MECHANICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT 8 2 1 2 ELECTRICAL CO...

Page 1157: ......

Page 1158: ...cedure Safety Turn off the main power switch and unplug the machine before beginning any of the replacement procedures in this manual Symbols Used in this Manual This manual uses the following symbols...

Page 1159: ......

Page 1160: ...Rear Cover SM 1 D351 Paper Feed Unit PB3040 D351 1 REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT 1 1 REAR COVER 1 Securing brackets A x 1 each 2 Rear cover B x 2...

Page 1161: ...1 LIFT MOTORS 1 Rear cover Rear Cover 2 Lift motors A B x 2 x 1 each 1 2 2 UPPER AND LOWER PAPER FEED CLUTCHES 1 Rear cover Rear Cover 2 Upper paper feed gear unit A x 3 x 1 3 Upper paper feed clutch...

Page 1162: ...paper feed clutch bracket D x 1 bushing x 1 x 2 6 Lower paper feed clutch E x 1 1 2 3 PAPER FEED MOTOR 1 Rear cover Rear Cover 2 Paper feed motor A x 1 x 2 When installing the paper feed motor make s...

Page 1163: ...Main Board D351 4 SM 1 3 MAIN BOARD 1 Rear cover Rear Cover 2 Main board A All s x 2 snap pin x 2...

Page 1164: ...LIFT PAPER END AND RELAY SENSORS 1 Paper feed unit Paper Feed Unit 2 Vertical transport sensor bracket A x 1 3 Vertical transport sensor B x 1 4 Paper feed sensor bracket C x 1 5 Paper feed sensor D x...

Page 1165: ...SM 1 5 PAPER FEED UNIT 1 Right cover A x 2 2 Vertical transport guide B of the paper feed unit 1 Pull the tray 3 or 4 2 Paper guide C 3 Paper feed unit D x 2 x 1 x 2 When replacing the paper feed unit...

Page 1166: ...eparation Rollers SM 7 D351 Paper Feed Unit PB3040 D351 1 6 PICK UP PAPER FEED AND SEPARATION ROLLERS 1 Paper feed unit Paper Feed Unit 2 Roller holder A x 1 3 Pick up roller B 4 Paper feed roller C 5...

Page 1167: ...tray 2 Paper size switch Upper tray 3 Pick up roller Upper tray 4 Paper feed roller 5 Vertical transport roller 6 Separation roller 7 Tray lift arm 8 Lift arm shaft 9 Bottom plate 10 End plate Listed...

Page 1168: ...enoid 8 Lower paper feed clutch 9 Vertical transport guide switch 10 Paper end sensor 11 Vertical transport sensor 1 12 Paper feed sensor 13 Paper size switch Lower tray 14 Paper size switch Upper tra...

Page 1169: ...anism is used Paper Feed Methods in the Core Technology Manual Drive Path Tray 3 upper tray and tray 4 lower tray have identical paper feed systems The feed motor A drives all the rollers in the unit...

Page 1170: ...he actuator B is moved by the end plate C 0 Not pushed 1 Pushed Models Switch Location North America Europe Asia SW4 SW3 SW2 DLT A3 SEF 1 A3 DLT SEF 1 1 1 0 LG B4 SEF 2 B4 LG SEF 2 1 1 1 A4 SEF A4 SEF...

Page 1171: ...ng of SP5 181 9 or 13 The machine disables paper feed from a tray if the paper size cannot be detected if the paper size actuator is broken or no tray is installed For non standard paper sizes if they...

Page 1172: ...remove jammed paper easily When the paper tray A is not in the machine the separation roller B is away from the paper feed roller C and the pick up roller stays in its upper position When the paper tr...

Page 1173: ...semicircles and it is engaged with the lift arm shaft via gears The paper height sensors detect the paper size depending on the position of the two semicircles The list shown below shows the detection...

Page 1174: ...ND AND BOTTOM PLATE The paper stack raises the paper end feeler A and the paper end sensor B deactivates if there is some paper in the paper tray When the paper tray runs out of paper the paper end fe...

Page 1175: ...tray lift motor engages the pin C on the lift arm shaft D Then the tray lift arm lifts the tray bottom plate E until the paper lift sensor for the tray detects that the top of the stack is at the pap...

Page 1176: ...LCIT PB3050 D352 D352 LCIT PB3050 Page Date Added Updated New None...

Page 1177: ......

Page 1178: ...D CLUTCH 5 1 6 PAPER FEED UNIT 6 1 7 MOTORS 7 1 7 1 TRAY LIFT MOTOR 7 1 7 2 TRAY MOTOR 8 1 8 PICK UP FEED AND SEPARATION ROLLERS 9 1 9 PAPER FEED PAPER END LIFT AND RELAY SENSORS 10 1 10 PAPER FEED 11...

Page 1179: ......

Page 1180: ...cedure Safety Turn off the main power switch and unplug the machine before beginning any of the replacement procedures in this manual Symbols Used in this Manual This manual uses the following symbols...

Page 1181: ......

Page 1182: ...Pull the LCT drawer If the right tray comes up with the left tray push the right tray into the LCT 2 Left tray A x 2 3 Remove the right tray B while pressing down the stopper C When reinstalling the t...

Page 1183: ...APER STORAGE SIDE 1 Tray Left and Right Tray 2 Rear fence A x 1 3 Rear fence bracket B x 2 4 Paper height sensors C x 1 each 1 2 2 END FENCE HP SENSOR PAPER END SENSOR 2 1 Bottom cover D x 1 2 End fen...

Page 1184: ...Changing the Tray Size SM 3 D352 LCT PB3050 D352 1 3 CHANGING THE TRAY SIZE 1 Remove the fence screws x 5 2 Change the position of the fences Before fastening the screws set paper in the tray...

Page 1185: ...Main Board D352 4 SM 1 4 MAIN BOARD 1 Rear cover Tray Lift Motor 2 Main board A All s x 2 snap x 2...

Page 1186: ...5 1 STACK TRANSPORT CLUTCH 1 Rear cover Tray Lift Motor 2 Stack transport clutch A x 1 x 1 1 5 2 PAPER FEED CLUTCH 1 Rear cover Tray Lift Motor 2 Paper feed gear unit A x 3 x 1 3 Paper feed clutch br...

Page 1187: ...Paper Feed Unit D352 6 SM 1 6 PAPER FEED UNIT 1 Right cover A 2 Open the vertical guide plate B 3 Guide plate C 4 Pull the LCT drawer D 5 Paper feed unit E x 2 x 1...

Page 1188: ...Motors SM 7 D352 LCT PB3050 D352 1 7 MOTORS 1 7 1 TRAY LIFT MOTOR 1 Securing brackets A x 1 each 2 Rear cover B x 2 3 Tray lift motor C x 1 x 3...

Page 1189: ...Motors D352 8 SM 1 7 2 TRAY MOTOR 1 Rear cover Tray Lift Motor 2 Tray motor A x 1 x 2 When installing the tray motor make sure that the gear of the tray motor holds the timing belt B...

Page 1190: ...ed and Separation Rollers SM 9 D352 LCT PB3050 D352 1 8 PICK UP FEED AND SEPARATION ROLLERS 1 Paper feed unit Paper Feed Unit 2 Separation roller A x 1 3 Roller holder B x 1 4 Feed roller C and pick u...

Page 1191: ...ND RELAY SENSORS 1 Paper feed unit Paper Feed Unit 2 Vertical transport sensor bracket A x 1 x 1 3 Relay sensor B 4 Paper feed sensor bracket C 5 Paper feed sensor D 6 Paper end feeler E 7 Paper end s...

Page 1192: ...EED This products uses an FRR type paper feed mechanism The paper feed unit consists of the pick up roller A paper feed roller B separation roller C and relay rollers There is a torque limiter in the...

Page 1193: ...COMPONENT LAYOUT 2 1 1 MECHANICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT 1 Pick up Roller 2 Paper Feed Roller 3 Relay Sensor 4 Separation Roller 5 Paper Height Sensors 1 2 3 6 Lower Limit Sensor 7 Paper End Sensor 2 8 End...

Page 1194: ...5 Pick up solenoid 6 Right tray lock solenoid 7 Vertical guide switch 8 Lift sensor 9 Relay sensor 10 Paper end sensor 1 11 Paper feed sensors 12 Side fence sensor 13 Tray lift motor 14 Paper height s...

Page 1195: ...de paper feed side of the tray has been used up If there is a paper stack in the left side paper storage side this is moved into the paper feed side If there is no paper stack in the left side paper e...

Page 1196: ...of the tray 20 Switches SW1 Vertical Guide Detects whether the right cover is open 7 SW2 Tray Set Switch Detects whether the tray is correctly set 15 SW3 Left Tray Set Switch Detects whether the left...

Page 1197: ...elease automatically When the paper tray A is not inside the machine the separation roller B is away from the paper feed roller C and the pick up roller D stays in the upper position When the paper tr...

Page 1198: ...tor stops lifting the plate when the upper limit sensor actuator enters the sensor Electrical Component Layout When paper in the tray is used up the pick up roller is gradually lowered and the actuato...

Page 1199: ...1 to 3 Left Tray Paper storage side Paper height sensor 4 and 5 Paper end sensor 2 Right Tray Paper Height Sensor Amount of paper 1 2 3 Paper End Sensor Display No of Line 100 OFF OFF OFF ON 4 70 OFF...

Page 1200: ...d sensor 1 A detects when copy paper in the paper feed side runs out When there is paper in the tray the paper pushes up the feeler B and the actuator enters the sensor When paper runs out the feeler...

Page 1201: ...ectrical Component Layout does not switch on so drive from the tray motor only transfers to the relay roller and not to the fence mechanism While the stack is in motion it pushes the side fence D asid...

Page 1202: ...1200 SHEET LCIT RT3000 D353 D353 LCIT RT3000 Page Date Added Updated New None...

Page 1203: ......

Page 1204: ...TRAY LIFT MOTOR 5 1 4 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS 6 1 4 1 MAIN BOARD 6 1 4 2 LCT SET SWITCHES 6 1 4 3 DOWN SWITCH 7 1 4 4 PAPER FEED PAPER END TRAY LIFT AND RELAY SENSORS 7 1 4 5 STACK SENSOR 9 1 5 SIDE FEN...

Page 1205: ......

Page 1206: ...ure Safety Turn off the main power switch and unplug the machine before beginning any of the replacement procedures in this manual Symbols Used in this Manual This manual uses the following symbols Se...

Page 1207: ......

Page 1208: ...Covers SM 1 D353 1200 Sheet LCT RT3000 D353 1 REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT 1 1 COVERS 1 1 1 REAR COVER 1 Cover A x 1 2 Rear cover B x 3 1 1 2 RIGHT DOOR 1 Right lower cover A x 2 2 Right door B x 1...

Page 1209: ...Covers D353 2 SM 1 1 3 FRONT AND TOP COVERS 1 Right door p 1 Rear Cover 2 Switch cover A x 2 3 Front cover B x 4 4 Top cover C x 2...

Page 1210: ...3 1200 Sheet LCT RT3000 D353 1 2 PAPER FEED 1 2 1 PICK UP PAPER FEED AND SEPARATION ROLLERS 1 Open the right door 2 Sensor bracket A x 2 3 Rollers B C D x 1 each B Paper feed roller C Pick up roller D...

Page 1211: ...53 4 SM 1 3 DRIVE 1 3 1 PAPER FEED CLUTCH 1 Rear cover p 1 Rear Cover 2 Bracket A x 1 x 2 bushing x 1 3 Paper feed clutch B x 1 x 1 1 3 2 PAPER FEED MOTOR 1 Rear cover p 1 Rear Cover 1 Paper feed moto...

Page 1212: ...Drive SM 5 D353 1200 Sheet LCT RT3000 D353 1 3 3 TRAY LIFT MOTOR 1 Rear cover p 1 Rear Cover 2 Tray lift motor unit A x 4 x 1...

Page 1213: ...LECTRICAL COMPONENTS 1 4 1 MAIN BOARD 1 Rear cover p 1 Rear Cover 2 Main board x 2 all s 1 4 2 LCT SET SWITCHES Rear 1 Rear cover p 1 Rear Cover 2 Switch bracket A x 3 3 Rear LCT set switch B Front 1...

Page 1214: ...et switch A x 1 1 4 3 DOWN SWITCH 1 Front cover p 2 Front and Top Covers 2 Switch base A x 2 x 1 3 Down button B spring x 1 4 Down switch C hook 1 4 4 PAPER FEED PAPER END TRAY LIFT AND RELAY SENSORS...

Page 1215: ...nt ground plate B x 1 5 Paper feed unit C x 2 x 1 x 1 6 Paper feed unit cover D x 5 x 1 Before you re install the paper feed unit cover make sure that the pick up solenoid holds the pick up roller lev...

Page 1216: ...Sensors E F G H x 1 hooks each E Tray lift sensor F Relay sensor G Paper feed sensor H Paper end sensor 1 4 5 STACK SENSOR 1 Open the right door 2 Paper feed unit p 7 Paper Feed Paper End Tray Lift a...

Page 1217: ...ion 3 Remove the front and rear side fences A B x 1 each 4 Install the side fences in the correct position A4 LEF LT LEF B5 LEF 5 Pull the end fence C for B5 size paper as shown x 1 if the the side fe...

Page 1218: ...sor 4 Paper Feed Roller 5 Paper Feed Sensor 6 Paper End Sensor 7 Pick up Roller 8 Tray Lift Motor 9 Paper Height Sensor 1 10 Interlock Switches 11 Paper Height Sensor 2 12 Sub Paper Height Sensor 13 T...

Page 1219: ...Main Board 8 Tray Down Switch 9 Relay Sensor 10 Tray Lift Sensor 11 Pick up Roller Solenoid 12 Paper Feed Sensor 13 Paper End Sensor 14 Paper Height Sensor 1 15 Paper Height Sensor 2 16 Sub Paper Hei...

Page 1220: ...per end 13 S4 Tray Lift Detects when the paper is at the correct paper feed height 10 S5 Paper Height 1 14 S6 Paper Height 2 15 S7 Sub Paper Height 16 S8 Paper Height 3 Detects the amount of paper rem...

Page 1221: ...T Set Detects whether the LCT is correctly set 1 SW3 Rear LCT Set Detects whether the LCT is correctly set 2 SW4 Down Lowers the tray to the paper supply position if pressed 8 Magnetic Clutches MC1 Pa...

Page 1222: ...Component Layout SM 15 D353 1200 Sheet LCT RT3000 D353 2 1 4 DRIVE LAYOUT 1 Tray Lift Motor 2 Paper Feed Motor 3 Pick up Roller 4 Paper Feed Clutch 5 Relay Roller 6 Separation Roller 7 Tray Drive Belt...

Page 1223: ...r The paper feed clutch transfers drive to the paper feed roller E pick up roller G and separation roller H The rotating pick up roller lowers and feeds the first sheet when it contacts the top of the...

Page 1224: ...mode Tray lowering conditions Paper supply position In the following conditions the tray lift motor lowers the tray until the stack sensor D turns on this is the correct tray position for supplying pa...

Page 1225: ...ow 0 outputs from three sensors paper height sensor 1 A 2 B 3 D and sub paper height sensor C Amount of paper PH S 1 PH S 2 PH S 3 Sub PH S Indicator on the operation panel 100 0 0 0 0 Four lines 0 0...

Page 1226: ...he paper end sensor E monitors the light reflected by each sheet on top of the stack When the last sheet feeds the cutout F is exposed and the paper end sensor receives no reflected light from below b...

Page 1227: ...500 SHEET FINISHER SR3050 D372 500 SHEET FINISHER SR3050 REVISION HISTORY Page Date Added Updated New None...

Page 1228: ......

Page 1229: ...R 8 1 3 2 TRANSPORT MOTOR 8 1 3 3 POSITIONING ROLLER ARM MOTOR 9 1 3 4 STAPLER MOVEMENT MOTOR 10 1 3 5 FRONT FENCE MOTOR 11 1 3 6 FEED OUT BELT MOTOR REAR FENCE MOTOR 11 1 4 BOARDS 13 1 4 1 MAIN BOARD...

Page 1230: ...ER MOVEMENT MOTOR INITIALIZATION 35 2 4 3 STAPLER ERRORS 36 2 5 PAPER OUTPUT 37 2 5 1 OVERVIEW 37 2 5 2 FEED OUT 40 2 5 3 FEED OUT BELT INITIALIZATION 41 2 5 4 FEED OUT BELT ERRORS 41 2 5 5 FEED OUT E...

Page 1231: ...ted 6 The inside and the metal parts of the fusing unit become extremely hot while the printer is operating Be careful to avoid touching those components with your bare hands 7 To prevent a fire or ex...

Page 1232: ...ons and heat build up The danger of explosion exists if a battery of this type is incorrectly replaced Replace only with the same or an equivalent type recommended by the manufacturer Discard used bat...

Page 1233: ...prevent damage to the machine This information provides tips and advice about how to best service the machine Trademarks Microsoft Windows and MS DOS are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation...

Page 1234: ......

Page 1235: ...must be removed from the machine for these procedures The front and rear covers cannot be removed while the finisher is attached to the side of the machine 1 Disconnect the finisher I F cable A on the...

Page 1236: ...or A 2 Remove the front cover B x2 Release tab C after removing the screws then raise the bottom of the front cover to remove it 1 1 3 REAR COVER Preparation Disconnect the finisher Remove the finishe...

Page 1237: ...Procedures SM 3 D372 500 Sheet Finisher D372 1 1 4 TRANSPORT UNIT Preparation Remove Front cover Rear cover 1 Remove the paper output tray A x2 2 Remove the left top cover A x2 3 Remove the tray suppo...

Page 1238: ...Common Procedures D372 4 SM 4 Remove the screws of the end fence A x3 5 Release tabs B and C 6 Remove the end fence 7 Remove the main board A x 14 x4...

Page 1239: ...Common Procedures SM 5 D372 500 Sheet Finisher D372 8 Remove the positioning roller arm motor bracket A x2 9 Remove the transport unit A x3 Rear x2 Front...

Page 1240: ...ENTRANCE SENSOR Preparation Disconnect the finisher Remove the finisher from the side of the machine 1 Remove the sensor bracket A x1 2 Disconnect the entrance sensor B Pawls x4 x1 1 2 2 PAPER SENSOR...

Page 1241: ...Sensors SM 7 D372 500 Sheet Finisher D372 Remove the finisher from the side of the machine Remove the transport unit 1 Disconnect the sensor A x1 Pawls x3 x1...

Page 1242: ...Disconnect the finisher Remove the finisher from the side of the machine Remove the front cover 1 Remove the tray lift motor A x2 x1 1 3 2 TRANSPORT MOTOR Preparation Disconnect the finisher Remove th...

Page 1243: ...ing belt is set correctly Rotate the motor drive gear by hand and confirm that these rollers are turning 1 entrance roller 2 positioning roller and 3 return rollers The return rollers are the two smal...

Page 1244: ...ER MOVEMENT MOTOR Preparation Disconnect the finisher Remove the finisher from the side of the machine Remove the rear cover 1 Remove the main board A x 14 x4 2 Remove the stapler movement motor A x2...

Page 1245: ...finisher from the side of the machine Remove the transport unit 1 Remove the front fence motor A x1 x2 x1 1 3 6 FEED OUT BELT MOTOR REAR FENCE MOTOR Preparation Disconnect the finisher Remove the fini...

Page 1246: ...Motors D372 12 SM B 1st bracket x2 C 2nd bracket x2 D 3rd bracket 3 Remove the rear fence motor E x2 x1...

Page 1247: ...s SM 13 D372 500 Sheet Finisher D372 1 4 BOARDS 1 4 1 MAIN BOARD Preparation Disconnect the finisher Remove the finisher from the side of the machine Remove the rear cover 1 Remove the main board A x1...

Page 1248: ...5 OTHERS 1 5 1 STAPLER Preparation Remove the front cover 1 Remove the stapler A x1 x2 1 5 2 POSITIONING ROLLER Preparation Disconnect the finisher Remove the finisher from the side of the machine Rem...

Page 1249: ...eet Finisher D372 Remove the rear cover 1 Remove the left top cover A x2 2 Rotate drive gear B of the positioning roller arm motor to raise the positioning roller to its highest position 3 Remove the...

Page 1250: ...2 10 Bottom Fences 2 Tray Upper Limit Switch 11 Feed out Belt 3 Positioning Roller 12 Feed out Belt Pawls x2 4 Exit Roller 13 Tray Lift Motor 5 Return Roller 14 End Fence 6 Entrance Roller 15 Paper Se...

Page 1251: ...s see the other sections of this manual First the operator pulls out the tray extension 1 and selects the paper size and operation mode for the job Normal Shift or Stapling Paper Transport The entranc...

Page 1252: ...edge depressor solenoid 12 switches on and retracts the edge depressors just before the feed out belt pawls push the stack out The two stack edge depressors 13 lightly push down on the trailing edge...

Page 1253: ...racts the edge depressors and then switches off to allow the depressors to lower 3 The tray lift motor switches on lowers the tray slightly raises it to the start position and switches off 4 The front...

Page 1254: ...Overview D372 20 SM No What Happens sure that the stapler is at its home position...

Page 1255: ...Edge Depressors 9 Entrance Sensor 2 Positioning Roller 10 Mobile Fence 3 Exit Roller 11 Bottom Fences x2 4 Return Rollers 12 Feed Out Belts x2 5 Entrance Roller 13 Feed Out Belt Pawls x2 6 Bridge Unit...

Page 1256: ...rollers in the unit The entrance rollers 2 take the paper from the copier and feed it to the exit rollers 3 where the paper drops onto the jogging and stapling tray The return rollers 4 rotate in the...

Page 1257: ...ed The transport motor slows down to match the speed of the main machine s exit roller At the same time the positioning roller motor accelerates briefly lowers the positioning roller arm and then stop...

Page 1258: ...transport motor speed accelerates to 600 mm s after the leading edge of the sheet passes the entrance sensor and feeds 21 5 mm After the trailing edge goes 96 mm past the entrance sensor the transport...

Page 1259: ...on and rotates the positioning roller to home position The positioning roller arm motor switches on lowers the positioning roller arm raises the positioning roller to the up position and then stops wh...

Page 1260: ...backward The diagram above shows the positions of the side fences 1 When the copier exit sensor signals that that a sheet of paper has been sent from the copier to the finisher both fence motors swit...

Page 1261: ...ode the stack is output regardless of whether the document has finished printing or not In stapling mode the side fence that jogs the side of the stack stops and waits for stapling to end After stapli...

Page 1262: ...ob At the end of the job every set is stacked on the output tray neatly offset by 30 mm making them easy to separate Normal Non Shift Mode The diagram above illustrates the operation of the side fence...

Page 1263: ...on the type of stapling selected for the job One staple front oblique front straight rear oblique rear straight Two staples at two positions Staple Mode 1 Staple In the One Staple Mode one side fence...

Page 1264: ...tialization is not executed if the paper sensor on the stapling tray detects paper present Fence HP Sensor OFF The fence motor switches on until the HP sensor goes ON advances 0 25 mm then switches OF...

Page 1265: ...top cover or the stapler door triggers the initial check and restores normal operation if no problems are detected At the second occurrence after an SC code is issued cycling the main machine off on m...

Page 1266: ...stment mm ON ON OFF OFF 2 0 ON OFF ON ON 1 5 ON OFF ON OFF 1 0 ON OFF OFF ON 0 5 ON OFF OFF OFF 0 0 OFF ON ON ON 3 5 OFF ON ON OFF 3 0 OFF ON OFF ON 2 5 OFF ON OFF OFF 2 0 OFF OFF ON ON 1 5 OFF OFF ON...

Page 1267: ...Rail 6 Trip Plate Center 3 Driver Gear Timing Belt 7 Trip Plate Front 4 Stapler Movement Motor 8 Stapler HP Sensor The illustration below shows how the stapler moves during each stapling mode When the...

Page 1268: ...Stapling D372 34 SM Staple Positions Front Oblique Stapling 1 Staple Front Straight Stapling 1 Staple Rear Straight Stapling 1 Staple 2 Staples Rear then Front...

Page 1269: ...feed the staples to the clincher 2 that performs the stapling The pressure of the plunger 11 feeds the next staple for firing A staple supply pawl below the staple sheet moves to the front and back to...

Page 1270: ...e position the stapler HP sensor does not go ON even after the stapler movement motor has been on long enough to move the stapler into the home position Stapler is out of staples At power on if staple...

Page 1271: ...lts 3 and 4 The rear pawl 5 and front pawl 6 attached to the rear and front belts push the stack out of the finisher after stapling The feed out belt motor also drives the timing belt and shaft 7 that...

Page 1272: ...dge of each sheet against these fences When the stack is ready to be moved to the output tray the mobile fence 6 pushes the stack to the right The rear pawl 4 and front pawl 5 mounted on the rear and...

Page 1273: ...e front and rear pawls 5 and 6 behind the stack so they can push the stack out of the finisher In the right illustration after stack output The mobile fence driven by its cam follower and lever below...

Page 1274: ...ready to be output The output belt pawls are at their home positions A The mobile fence B is at its home position between the front and rear bottom fences C The mobile fence pushes the stack to the ri...

Page 1275: ...ter clockwise until the HP goes ON and then stops This is the home position 2 5 4 FEED OUT BELT ERRORS A feed out belt error can occur in two cases The feed out belt HP sensor does not go OFF even aft...

Page 1276: ...railing edges of the stacks are catching on the end fence and not falling straight down onto the tray When the feed out belt pawls A push a stack of paper B onto the tray C a bend D forms at the trail...

Page 1277: ...y 6 mm the distance that the pawls must push the trailing edge of the stack The extra 6 mm forces the edge of the stack to bend more so it will snap down with more force and not catch on the end fence...

Page 1278: ...s and lowers the output tray 2 The edge depressors 3 lightly press down on the trailing edges of stacks already on the tray to keep them down against the end fence When the actuator on the bottom of t...

Page 1279: ...e tray lift motor switches on 300 ms for shift mode 500 ms for stapling mode lowers the output tray stops then waits to receive the stack Just before a stack falls onto the output tray the edge depres...

Page 1280: ...ecessary to move the tray up or down After 200 ms if the paper height sensor is ON the tray lift motor switches ON and raises the tray If the paper height sensor is OFF the tray lift motor lowers the...

Page 1281: ...ay and edge depressors operate together Stack Output to Tray The feed out motor switches on and starts to move the feed out belts and pawls pushing the stack toward the output tray The tray motor swit...

Page 1282: ...pawls move to their home positions and stop The sequence starts again with the next finished stack 2 6 3 TRAY INITIALIZATION The following sequence occurs at power on depending on the states of the p...

Page 1283: ...ay lift motor if the tray full sensor or paper height sensors fail The table below shows how the state of the two sensors and one switch signal an error Tray Upper Limit SW Tray Full Sn Paper Hgt Sn W...

Page 1284: ...ft Motor Error is issued To recover from an error At the first occurrence of the error after a paper jam error opening and closing either the top cover or the stapler door triggers the initial check a...

Page 1285: ...r 4 Stapler Movement Motor 17 Feed Out Belt Motor 5 Entrance Sensor 18 Output Tray Full Sensor 6 Stapling Tray Paper Sensor 19 Rear Fence Motor 7 Front Fence HP Sensor 20 Positioning Roller HP Sensor...

Page 1286: ...6 Transport Motor Drives all the rollers in the finisher entrance roller positioning roller return rollers exit roller M7 Tray Lift Motor Raises and lowers the output tray M8 Stapler Motor The motor i...

Page 1287: ...ls the tray lift motor to lower the tray S5 Positioning Roller HP Sensor Detects the HP of the positioning roller when it is up S6 Rear Fence HP Sensor Detects the HP of the rear fence at the back of...

Page 1288: ...ened or closed SW3 Tray Upper Limit Switch If the tray becomes full the top of the stack will push up a plate that activates this switch and switches off the finisher This is a backup feature that wil...

Page 1289: ...Electrical Components SM 55 D372 500 Sheet Finisher D372 2 7 3 TIMING CHARTS The first flowchart below is the operational timing chart for shift mode the second chart is for stapling mode Shift Mode...

Page 1290: ...2 Remove jammed paper or staple 3 Close the top cover or stapler door 1st Occurrence Jam Error 1 Open top cover or stapler door 2 Remove jammed paper or staple 3 Close the top cover or stapler door 2n...

Page 1291: ...times the length of the paper size signaled by the main machine Solution 3 Paper in paper path Problem Occurs at power on or after the top cover or stapler door has been closed After the top or staple...

Page 1292: ...de fence motor remained on for 50 pulses to move the fence toward the rear The front side fence HP sensor did not switch from OFF to ON after the front side fence motor remained on for 420 pulses Solu...

Page 1293: ...after the stapler movement motor ran for 5600 pulses Solution 10 Stapler motor error Problem Occurs during staple supply to the stapler The stapler operation stapling did not end after 600 ms A staple...

Page 1294: ...op cover 16 Stapler cover open Problem The stapler cover remained open longer than 2 ms Solution Close the stapler cover 17 Tray upper limit switch is ON Problem The tray upper limit switch remained o...

Page 1295: ...Electrical Components SM 61 D372 500 Sheet Finisher D372 No Error Problem Solution Solution DFU 20 Abnormal data transfer Problem A problem has been detected at ASAP during data transmission Solution...

Page 1296: ...Up to 253 g m2 220K without shift Stapling Stack Height for Stapling 50 sheets A4 LT and smaller 30 sheets B4 LG and larger Size A3 SEF to B5 SEF can be mixed if same width Stack Thickness 64g m2 45...

Page 1297: ...Sheets 25 to 8 A4 B5 LT SEF 2 to 9 Sheets 55 to 27 10 to 30 Sheets 25 to 8 A3 B4 DLT LG Stacking Non Stapling Mode Vertical 15 mm or less Horizontal 15 mm or less Jogging Precision 2 to 30 Sheets 2 m...

Page 1298: ...BRIDGE UNIT BU3030 D386 D386 BRIDGE UNIT BU3030 Page Date Added Updated New None...

Page 1299: ......

Page 1300: ...ENT 1 1 1 BRIDGE UNIT CONTROL BOARD 1 1 2 BRIDGE UNIT DRIVE MOTOR 2 1 3 TRAY EXIT SENSOR 3 1 4 RELAY SENSOR 4 2 DETAILS 5 2 1 MECHANICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT 5 2 2 DRIVE LAYOUT 6 2 3 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT...

Page 1301: ......

Page 1302: ...r switch and unplug the machine before beginning any of the replacement procedures in this manual When taking apart the bridge unit first take the unit out of the copier Symbols Used in this Manual Th...

Page 1303: ......

Page 1304: ...Board SM 1 D386 Bridge Unit BU3030 D386 1 REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT 1 1 BRIDGE UNIT CONTROL BOARD 1 Bridge unit Installation Procedure in the base copier manual 2 Rear cover A x 2 3 Bridge unit cont...

Page 1305: ...t Drive Motor D386 2 SM 1 2 BRIDGE UNIT DRIVE MOTOR 1 Bridge unit Installation Procedure in the base copier manual 2 Rear cover Bridge Unit Control Board 3 Bracket A x 3 x 2 4 Bridge unit drive motor...

Page 1306: ...SM 3 D386 Bridge Unit BU3030 D386 1 3 TRAY EXIT SENSOR 1 Bridge unit Installation Procedure in the base copier manual 2 Rear cover Bridge Unit Control Board 3 Paper tray A 4 Exit guide B x 1 5 Tray e...

Page 1307: ...Relay Sensor D386 4 SM 1 4 RELAY SENSOR 1 Bridge unit Installation Procedure in the base copier manual 2 Paper tray A 3 Relay sensor B x 1...

Page 1308: ...t SM 5 D386 Bridge Unit BU3030 D386 2 DETAILS 2 1 MECHANICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT 1 Upper Exit Roller 2 Tray Exit Sensor 3 Junction Gate 4 1st Transport Roller 5 Relay Sensor 6 2nd Transport Roller 7 Left...

Page 1309: ...Drive Layout D386 6 SM 2 2 DRIVE LAYOUT 1 Left Exit Roller 2 2nd Transport Roller 3 1st Transport Roller 4 Upper Exit Roller 5 Bridge Unit Drive Motor...

Page 1310: ...out SM 7 D386 Bridge Unit BU3030 D386 2 3 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT 1 Left Guide Switch 2 Right Guide Switch 3 Junction Gate Solenoid 4 Tray Exit Sensor 5 Bridge Unit Control Board 6 Bridge Unit Dri...

Page 1311: ...t Checks for misfeeds 4 S2 Relay Checks for misfeeds 7 Switches SW2 Right Guide Detects when the right guide is opened 2 SW3 Left Guide Detects when the left guide is opened 1 Solenoids SOL1 Junction...

Page 1312: ...the bridge unit or to the finisher depending on which has been selected If the junction gate solenoid has been activated the junction gate A points downward and directs the paper to the upper tray B...

Page 1313: ...PAPER FEED UNIT PB3080 D387 D387 PAPER FEED UNIT PB3080 Page Date Added Updated New None...

Page 1314: ......

Page 1315: ...T 1 1 1 REAR COVER 1 1 2 MOTORS CLUTCH AND MAIN BOARD 2 1 2 1 LIFT MOTOR 2 1 2 2 PAPER FEED CLUTCH 3 1 2 3 PAPER FEED MOTOR 3 1 2 4 MAIN BOARD 4 1 3 PAPER FEED UNIT 5 1 4 ROLLERS AND SENSORS 6 1 4 1 P...

Page 1316: ......

Page 1317: ...cedure Safety Turn off the main power switch and unplug the machine before beginning any of the replacement procedures in this manual Symbols Used in this Manual This manual uses the following symbols...

Page 1318: ......

Page 1319: ...Rear Cover SM 1 D387 Paper Feed Unit PB3080 D387 1 REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT 1 1 REAR COVER 1 Securing brackets A x 1 each 2 Rear cover B x 2...

Page 1320: ...Motors Clutch and Main Board D387 2 SM 1 2 MOTORS CLUTCH AND MAIN BOARD 1 2 1 LIFT MOTOR 1 Rear cover p 1 Rear Cover 2 Lift motor A x 2 x 1...

Page 1321: ...move the tray end cover A 3 Paper feed gear unit B x 3 x 1 4 Paper feed clutch bracket C x 1 x 2 bushing x 1 5 Paper feed clutch D 1 2 3 PAPER FEED MOTOR 1 Rear cover p 1 Rear Cover 2 Paper feed motor...

Page 1322: ...Motors Clutch and Main Board D387 4 SM 1 2 4 MAIN BOARD 1 Rear cover p 1 Rear Cover 2 Main board A All s x 2 snap pin x 2...

Page 1323: ...nit SM 5 D387 Paper Feed Unit PB3080 D387 1 3 PAPER FEED UNIT 1 Right cover A x 2 2 Stopper B x 1 3 Vertical transport guide C of the paper feed unit 4 Pull tray 3 5 Paper guide A 6 Paper feed unit B...

Page 1324: ...nsors D387 6 SM 1 4 ROLLERS AND SENSORS 1 4 1 PICK UP PAPER FEED AND SEPARATION ROLLERS 1 Paper feed unit p 5 Paper Feed Unit 2 Roller holder A x 1 3 Pick up roller B 4 Paper feed roller C 5 Separatio...

Page 1325: ...ER END AND RELAY SENSORS 1 Paper feed unit p 5 Paper Feed Unit 2 Vertical transport sensor bracket A x 1 3 Vertical transport sensor B x 1 4 Paper feed sensor bracket C x 1 5 Paper feed sensor D x 1 6...

Page 1326: ...Internal Shift Tray SH3040 D388 D388 INTERNAL SHIFT TRAY SH3040 Page Date Added Updated New None...

Page 1327: ......

Page 1328: ...Internal Shift Tray SH3040 D388 TABLE OF CONTENTS 1 REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT 1 1 1 TRAY COVER 1 When Attaching the Tray Cover 1 1 2 TRAY MOTOR AND HALF TURN SENSOR BOARD 2...

Page 1329: ......

Page 1330: ...ure Safety Turn off the main power switch and unplug the machine before beginning any of the replacement procedures in this manual Symbols Used in this Manual This manual uses the following symbols Se...

Page 1331: ......

Page 1332: ...t side of the cover When Attaching the Tray Cover The right side of the tray cover should be attached first 1 Fit the pawls C on the shift tray 2 Align the square D so that it fits into the groove in...

Page 1333: ...Tray Motor and Half Turn Sensor Board D388 2 SM 1 2 TRAY MOTOR AND HALF TURN SENSOR BOARD 1 Top cover p 1 Tray Cover 2 Slip disc A 3 Tray motor B x 1 4 Half turn sensor board C x 1...

Page 1334: ...C5000 D393 D393 FAX OPTION TYPE C5000 Page Date Added Updated New 43 10 05 2009 Error Code 31 21 added 159 02 02 2009 Service Ram Address 158 160 12 11 2009 Service Ram Address 158 160 05 14 2009 Serv...

Page 1335: ......

Page 1336: ...CHECK 14 1 3 2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 16 For Installing the single G3 Board 16 For Installing the Double G3 Boards 19 2 REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT 22 2 1 FCU 22 3 TROUBLESHOOTING 23 3 1 ERROR CODES 23...

Page 1337: ...4 3 2 I FAX SWITCHES 81 4 3 3 PRINTER SWITCHES 88 4 3 4 COMMUNICATION SWITCHES 95 4 3 5 G3 SWITCHES 104 4 3 6 G3 2 3 SWITCHES 114 4 3 7 IP FAX SWITCHES 123 4 4 NCU PARAMETERS 131 4 5 DEDICATED TRANSM...

Page 1338: ...be a remote risk of electric shock from lightning Do not use a telephone or cellular phone to report a gas leak in the vicinity of the leak Before installing the fax unit switch off the main switch a...

Page 1339: ...What it means Refer to section number Screw Connector E ring Clip ring Clamp Cautions Notes etc The following headings provide special information Failure to obey warning information could result in...

Page 1340: ...ata and to prevent damage to the machine Always obey these guidelines to avoid serious problems such as misfeeds damage to originals loss of valuable data and to prevent damage to the machine bold is...

Page 1341: ......

Page 1342: ...escription Q ty 1 FCU I F Board 1 2 FCU 1 3 FCU I F Board Bracket 1 4 Support Bracket 1 5 Speaker 1 6 Modular Bracket 1 7 Handset Bracket NA only 2 8 Handset Support Bracket NA only 1 9 Screw M3x6 NA...

Page 1343: ...Fax Unit D393 D393 2 SM No Description Q ty 17 Screw M3x6 13 18 Clamp 3 19 Fax Key top 2 20 EMC Address Decal 1 EU Only 21 Quick Reference Fax Guide 1 Excluding EU...

Page 1344: ...N PROCEDURE Before installing this fax unit Print out all data in the printer buffer Turn off the main power switch and disconnect the power cord and the network cable 1 Remove the controller board A...

Page 1345: ...M 3 Attach the FCU I F board A to the FCU I F board bracket x 4 4 Attach the support bracket A to the controller box x 2 5 Remove the TEL and LINE1 covers with a screw driver 6 Install the FCU A to th...

Page 1346: ...000 D393 7 Install the speaker A to the controller box x 2 and connect the speaker cable B with the speaker relay cable C x 3 8 Connect the two modular harnesses A B to the modular bracket C 9 Connect...

Page 1347: ...the MBU board is firmly connected to the FCU 12 Reinstall the controller box 13 Attach the handset support bracket and handset bracket to the copier and then connect the handset cord with the ferrite...

Page 1348: ...INE 1 jack 16 Replace bottom from the third key slot cover A to the fax key B 17 Attach the Multi Language Decals C EU only 18 Attach the decal A SUPER G3 to the front door 19 Attach the serial number...

Page 1349: ...urn on the main power of the machine Make sure that the outlet is grounded SRAM formatted shows on the operation panel after you have turned the main switch on Turn the main switch off and on again fo...

Page 1350: ...Installation Procedure in the Fax Unit D393 2 Controller box left cover Installation Procedure in the Fax Unit D393 3 Install the memory option A on the FCU 4 Re aasemble the machine 1 2 2 HANDSET B43...

Page 1351: ...lace the label B 4 Install the handset D on the cradle C 5 Attach the ferrite core E to the cable The length F must be 90 mm 6 Attach the two clamps G as shown 7 Line the cable H as shown x 2 8 Connec...

Page 1352: ...he optional handset is available for the U S version only 1 Remove the scanner left cover A x 2 2 Make two holes in the scanner left cover Drill a hole from the outside of the cover with a screwdriver...

Page 1353: ...cket set inside the scanner left cover 5 Secure the handset bracket D x 2 6 Install the scanner left cover on the machine 7 Attach the clamp to the location E 8 Set the handset on the handset bracket...

Page 1354: ...Fax Unit Options SM 13 D393 Fax Option Type C5000 D393 10 Clamp the hand set cord 11 Connect the handset cable to the TEL jack at the rear of the machine...

Page 1355: ...ntity and condition of the components against the following list No Description Q ty 1 SG3 Interface Unit 1 2 Modular Bracket for SG3 1 3 Clamp 2 4 Clamp 4 5 Screw M3x6 6 6 Ferrite Core 1 7 Telephone...

Page 1356: ...G3 Interface Unit D393 SM 15 D393 Fax Option Type C5000 D393...

Page 1357: ...rinter buffer Turn off the main switch and disconnect the power cord and the network cable You can add two more SG3 boards to this model Follow the procedures for adding the single SG3 board installat...

Page 1358: ...of the flat cable A to the connector B of the FCU board 3 Hold the flat cable with two clamps and pass the other end of the flat cable through the cutout as shown above 4 Connect the SG3 interface uni...

Page 1359: ...E2 cover with a screwdriver 7 Attach the socket of harness A LINE2 to the modular bracket B for SG3 8 Connect the harness A to the SG3 interface unit B x 4 9 Attach the modular bracket for SG3 to the...

Page 1360: ...from the SG3 interface units and then attach the SG3 board to the other SG3 interface unit x 2 2 Remove the controller box 3 Attach one end short length of the flat cable A to the connector B of the...

Page 1361: ...t A to the controller board B with the flat cable x 4 7 Attach the socket of harness A LINE2 and the socket of harness C LINE3 to the modular bracket for SG3 8 Connect the harness A LINE2 to the first...

Page 1362: ...ect the telephone cords to the LINE2 and LINE3 jacks for double SG3 board installation 13 Connect the power plug to a power outlet and turn on the main power switch 14 Enter the service mode Set bit 1...

Page 1363: ...move the MBU board from the old FCU board and install it on the new FCU board 2 Set the correct date and time with the User Tools User Tools System Settings Timer Setting Set Date Time Do not turn off...

Page 1364: ...ncompatible Replace the FCU Check for DIS NSF with an oscilloscope If the rx signal is weak there may be a bad line 0 01 DCN received unexpectedly The other party is out of paper or has a jammed print...

Page 1365: ...lizer settings Replace the FCU The other end may be defective or incompatible try sending to another machine Check for line problems Cross reference See error code 0 04 0 07 No post message response f...

Page 1366: ...other machine Noisy line resend Try adjusting the tx level and or cable equalizer settings Replace the FCU Cross reference See error code 0 08 0 15 The other terminal is not capable of specific functi...

Page 1367: ...al Check the connections between the FCU and line Check for line noise or other line problems Replace the FCU The remote machine may be defective or may have disconnected Cross reference Maximum inter...

Page 1368: ...ed tx parameters Section 4 0 32 The other terminal sent a DCS which contained functions that the receiving machine cannot handle Check the protocol dump list Ask the other party to contact the manufac...

Page 1369: ...ng a call from another V 8 V 34 fax 0 76 The calling terminal fell back to T 30 mode because it could not detect a JM in response to CM CM timeout The called terminal could not detect a CM due to nois...

Page 1370: ...Try using V 17 or a slower modem if the same error is frequent when receiving from multiple senders 0 84 The line was disconnected due to abnormal signaling in V 34 phase 4 control channel start up T...

Page 1371: ...then turn it back on Update the modem ROM Replace the FCU 2 23 JBIG compression or reconstruction error Turn off the machine then turn it back on 2 24 JBIG ASIC error Turn off the machine then turn it...

Page 1372: ...FCU 4 10 Communication failed because of an ID Code mismatch Closed Network or Tel No CSI mismatch Protection against Wrong Connections Get the ID Codes the same and or the CSIs programmed correctly t...

Page 1373: ...lace the FCU Try adjusting the rx cable equalizer Cross reference Rx cable equalizer G3 Switch 07 PSTN 6 06 G3 ECM coding decoding error Defective FCU The other terminal may be defective 6 08 G3 ECM P...

Page 1374: ...t 13 18 SIP server access error Incorrect initial setting for the SIP server Defective SIP server 13 24 SIP authentication error Registered password in the device does not match the password in the SI...

Page 1375: ...rator for direct SMTP sending and check the sending destination 14 03 Access to SMTP Server Denied 450 Failed to access the SMTP server because the access is denied SMTP server operating incorrectly C...

Page 1376: ...on the HDD where the target folder is located Insufficient free space on the HDD at the target destination for SMTP direct sending Contact the system administrator and check the amount of space remai...

Page 1377: ...ing Scan to Email while the buffer is being used send mail at the same time 14 12 Data Size Too Large Transmission was cancelled because the detected size of the file was too large 14 13 Send Cancelle...

Page 1378: ...file could not be created Not enough space in UFS area to handle both Scan to Email and IFAX transmission HDD full or not operating correctly Software error 14 32 Cancelled the Mail Due to Error Detec...

Page 1379: ...Error due to the existence of zero line page When the 0 line page exists in received pages with G3 communication the transmission is interrupted 15 01 POP3 IMAP4 Server Not Registered At startup the s...

Page 1380: ...is not in standard format There is no boundary between parts of the e mail including the header 15 16 Mail Size Receive Error The mail cannot be received because it is too large 15 17 Receive Timeout...

Page 1381: ...ould not receive transmission due to Resolution error Image of resolution greater than 200 dpi without extended memory Resolution is not supported Page size error The page size was larger than A3 Comp...

Page 1382: ...t or a request for notification of reception 15 81 Repeated Destination Registration Error Could not repeat receive the transmission because the destination buffer is full and the destination could no...

Page 1383: ...Delete unnecessary files from memory Transfer the substitute reception files to an another fax machine if the machine s printer is busy or out of order Add an optional SAF memory card or hard disk 22...

Page 1384: ...LAN Fax images during store the image to SAF of FCU The LAN Fax transmission of a message was cancelled by the LAN Fax driver F0 xx V 34 modem error Replace the FCU F6 xx SG3 modem error Update the SG...

Page 1385: ...stered in the TCP IP properties in the network setup correct Check the IP address with the administrator of the network 2 Check that PC can connect with the machine Use the ping command on the PC to c...

Page 1386: ...to check Send a test e mail with the machine s own number as the destination The machine receives the returned e mail if the communication is performed successfully 1 E mail account on the Server Make...

Page 1387: ...es 4 Router settings Use the ping command to contact the router Check that other devices connected to the router can sent data over the router Ask the administrator of the server to check 5 Error mess...

Page 1388: ...nual sending not supported 5 IP address of local machine registered Register the IP address 6 Remote terminal port number setting other than 1720 Send by specifying the port number 7 Specified port nu...

Page 1389: ...the network administrator 5 Is the IP address host name of the specified Gateway correct Check the IP address host name 6 Number of the specified fax correct Check the remote fax number 7 Firewall NAT...

Page 1390: ...remote fax Error Code 13 14 3 Firewall NAT installed Cannot breach the firewall Send by using another method Fax Internet Fax 4 Transmission sent manually Manual sending not supported 5 Gatekeeper in...

Page 1391: ...38 terminal Check whether the remote fax is a T38 terminal 14 Remote fax switched off or busy Contact the network administrator Request the system administrator to increase the bandwidth Raise the del...

Page 1392: ...equired Request the sender to specify the port number 5 Specified port number correct if required Request the sender to check the port number 6 DNS server registered when host name specified on sender...

Page 1393: ...host name 6 DNS server registered when host name specified on sender side Contact the network administrator 7 Network bandwidth too narrow Request the network administrator to increase the bandwidth 8...

Page 1394: ...network administrator The sender machine displays this error code when the sender fax is a Ricoh model 7 Enable H 323 SW is set to on Request the sender to check the settings User Parameter SW 34 Bit...

Page 1395: ...IP Fax Troubleshooting D393 54 SM The sender machine displays this error code when the sender fax is a Ricoh model...

Page 1396: ...or memory press the operation power switch to switch the power off wait for the power LED to go off and then switch the main power switch off The main power LED C lights or flashes while the platen c...

Page 1397: ...0 0F Change the bit switches for internet fax settings for the fax option Bit Switches Printer Switch 103 001 016 00 0F Change the bit switches for printer settings for the fax option Bit Switches Com...

Page 1398: ...3 3 Switch 107 001 016 00 0F Change the bit switches for the protocol settings of the optional G3 board Bit Switches G4 Internal Switch 108 001 032 00 1F Not used Do not change the bit switches G4 Par...

Page 1399: ...Dump Print out RAM data for the optional SG3 board 003 G3 3 Memory Dump Print out RAM data for the optional SG3 board 102 004 G4 Memory Dump Not used G3 1 NCU Parameters 103 001 023 CC 01 22 NCU param...

Page 1400: ...If the machine is installed on a PABX line select PABX PABX GND or PABX FLASH 002 PSTN Access Number Enter the PSTN access number for the G3 1 line 103 003 Memory Lock Disabled Not used PSTN 2 Port S...

Page 1401: ...SP on the machine does not send any fax messages on the G3 3 line ISDN Port Settings 001 Select Line 002 PSTN Access Number 106 003 Memory Lock Disabled 106 004 Transmission Disabled Not used Do not c...

Page 1402: ...FCU ROM version 102 001 Error Codes Displays the latest 64 fax error codes 103 001 G3 1 ROM Version Displays the G3 1 modem version 104 001 G3 2 ROM Version Displays the G3 2 modem version 105 001 G3...

Page 1403: ...Reset Bit Switches 103 000 Resets the bit switches and user parameters Factory setting 104 000 Resets the bit switches and user parameters user data in the SRAM and files in the SAF memory Initialize...

Page 1404: ...col dump list of all communications for the G3 1 line 003 G3 1 1 Communication Prints the protocol dump list of the last communication for the G3 1 line 004 G3 2 All Communications Prints the protocol...

Page 1405: ...having trouble printing confidential messages or recovering files stored using the memory lock feature Journal Print out 001 All Journals The machine prints all the communication records on the repor...

Page 1406: ...09 Fax Driver 010 G3CCU 011 Fax Job 012 CCU 013 Scanner Condition IP Protocol Dump List 001 All Communications Prints the protocol dump list of all communications for the IP fax line 108 002 1 Communi...

Page 1407: ...4 S2400baud 105 G3 1 V34 S2800baud 106 G3 1 V34 S3000baud 107 G3 1 V34 S3200baud 108 G3 1 V34 S3429baud 109 Recorded Message Test 110 G3 2 Modem Tests 111 G3 2 DTMF Tests 112 G3 2 V34 S2400baud 113 G3...

Page 1408: ...IG3 1 V34 S2400baud Not used 127 IG3 1 V34 S2800baud Not used 128 IG3 1 V34 S3000baud Not used 129 IG3 1 V34 S3200baud Not used 130 IG3 1 V34 S3429baud Not used 131 IG3 2 Modem Tests Not used 132 IG3...

Page 1409: ...Disabled 1 Enabled Set this bit to 1 before changing any dedicated transmission parameters Reset this bit to 0 after programming dedicated transmission parameters 1 Not used Do not change Technical da...

Page 1410: ...ting 4 Line error mark print 0 OFF 1 ON print When 1 is selected a line error mark is printed on the printout if a line error occurs during reception 5 G3 G4 communication parameter display 0 Disabled...

Page 1411: ...6 0 Always disabled Bit 7 0 Bit 6 1 User selectable Bit 7 1 Bit 6 0 User selectable Bit 7 1 Bit 6 1 Always enabled 0 0 All RDS systems are always locked out 0 1 1 0 Normally RDS systems are locked ou...

Page 1412: ...factory settings System Switch 07 Not used Do not change the factory settings System Switch 08 Not used Do not change the factory settings System Switch 09 SP No 1 101 010 No FUNCTION COMMENTS 0 Addit...

Page 1413: ...ting the protocol dump list 0 Print for all communications 1 Print only when there is a communication error This switch becomes effective only when system switch 00 bit 6 is set to 1 1 Set this bit to...

Page 1414: ...factory settings System Switch 0D Not used Do not change the factory settings System Switch 0E SP No 1 101 015 No FUNCTION COMMENTS 0 1 Not used Do not change the settings 2 Enable disable for direct...

Page 1415: ...an 04 Austria 14 Hong Kong 05 Belgium 15 South Africa 06 Denmark 16 Australia 07 Finland 17 New Zealand 08 Ireland 18 Singapore 09 Norway 19 Malaysia 0A Sweden 1A China 0 7 0B Switzerland 1B Formosa T...

Page 1416: ...n 00 FF H Default setting 02 H 512 KB System Switch 11 SP No 1 101 018 No FUNCTION COMMENTS 0 TTI printing position 0 Superimposed on the page data 1 Printed before the data leading edge Change this b...

Page 1417: ...sed do not change these settings System Switch 15 SP No 1 101 022 No FUNCTION COMMENTS 0 Not used Do not change the settings 1 Going into the Energy Saver mode automatically 0 Enabled 1 Disabled 1 The...

Page 1418: ...function allows the user to select the default G3 line type The optional SG3 unit s are required to use the PSTN 2 or 3 setting 2 7 Not used Do not change these settings System Switch 17 Not used do...

Page 1419: ...ON COMMENTS 0 7 LS RX memory remaining refresh value setting Sets a value of 4K If the amount of memory remaining falls below 4K documents received in memory are printed to create more space in memory...

Page 1420: ...he SAF memory has become full during scanning 0 The current page is erased 1 The entire file is erased 0 If the SAF memory becomes full during scanning the successfully scanned pages are transmitted 1...

Page 1421: ...ted Change this bit to 1 if the customer does not want to have a report in these cases Memory tx Memory storage report Parallel memory tx Transmission result report 2 Not used Do not change the settin...

Page 1422: ...is no negotiation with the receiving machine at the destination so the sending machine cannot make a selection for the receiving capabilities original width setting of the receiving machine The origi...

Page 1423: ...e between sender and receiver to determine the setting mail cannot negotiate between terminals the mm inch selection is determined by the sender fax When this switch is Off 0 Images scanned in inches...

Page 1424: ...rn Receipt This setting determines the text string output for the Return Receipt that confirms the transmission was received normally at the destination 2 3 00 Dispatched Sends from PC mail a request...

Page 1425: ...Switch 03 Not used do not change the settings SP No 1 102 004 I fax Switch 04 SP No 1 102 005 No FUNCTION COMMENTS Subject for Delivery TX Memory Transfer 0 This setting determines whether the RTI CS...

Page 1426: ...L to prevent problems when receiving transmissions 2 7 Not Used I fax Switch 05 SP No 1 102 006 No FUNCTION COMMENTS Mail Addresses of SMTP Broadcast Recipients 0 Determines whether the e mail address...

Page 1427: ...0 to 1024 KB HEX The hexadecimal number you enter is multiplied by 4 KB to determine the amount of memory I fax Switch 09 SP No 1 102 010 No FUNCTION COMMENTS 0 3 Not used Do not change the settings...

Page 1428: ...delivered or output immediately 0 Off Files received via SMTP are output immediately without delivery 1 On Files received via SMTP are delivered immediately to their destinations Signature for the SMT...

Page 1429: ...ecause the size of the paper is smaller than the size of the document received When A5 is used to print an A4 size document for example 1 Repetition of data when the received page is longer than the p...

Page 1430: ...g on the paper size available from the paper feed stations Refer to the table on the next page for how the machine chooses the paper width used in the setup protocol NSF DIS 1 The machine informs the...

Page 1431: ...e printed without length reduction Page separation threshold Printer Switch 03 bits 4 to 7 1 Incoming page length is reduced when printing Maximum reducible length Printer Switches 04 bits 0 to 4 1 3...

Page 1432: ...to 4 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 mm 0 0 0 0 1 5 mm 0 0 1 0 0 20 mm 1 1 1 1 1 155 mm 0 4 For A5 sideways and B5 sideways paper Maximum reducible length Paper length 0 75 x N x 5m...

Page 1433: ...COMMENTS 0 3 Not used Do not change the settings 4 List of destinations in the Communication Failure Report for broadcasting 0 All destinations 1 Only destinations where communication failure occurred...

Page 1434: ...Page separation 0 Enabled 1 Disabled 1 If all paper sizes in the machine require page separation to print a received fax message the machine does not print the message Substitute Reception is used Af...

Page 1435: ...g feature Bit 1 0 Bit 0 0 Disabled Bit 1 0 Bit 0 1 Disabled Bit 1 1 Bit 0 0 Enabled Bit 1 1 Bit 0 1 Not used 0 0 0 1 Disable smoothing if the machine receives halftone images from other manufacturers...

Page 1436: ...3 0 Bit 2 0 MH only Bit 3 0 Bit 2 1 MH MR Bit 3 1 Bit 2 0 MH MR MMR Bit 3 1 Bit 2 1 MH MR MMR JBIG These bits determine the compression capabilities to be used in the transmission and to be declared...

Page 1437: ...f the dialed telephone number This does not work when manually dialed 1 0 The same as above except that only the last 4 digits are compared 1 1 The machine will disconnect the line without sending a f...

Page 1438: ...xceeds the acceptable ratio RTN will be sent to the other end 2 Treatment of pages received with errors during G3 reception 0 Deleted from memory without printing 1 Printed 0 Pages received with error...

Page 1439: ...09 SP No 1 104 010 No FUNCTION COMMENTS 0 7 IP Fax dial interval setting Adjusts the interval of the I fax dialing The interval of I fax dialing is calculated by following formula Interval time speci...

Page 1440: ...x unit 4 kbytes e g 06 H 24 kbytes One page is about 24 kbytes The machine refers to this setting before each fax reception If the amount of remaining memory is below this threshold the machine cannot...

Page 1441: ...munication Switch 13 Not used do not change the settings Communication Switch 14 SP No 1 104 021 No FUNCTION COMMENTS 0 Inch to mm conversion during transmission 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 0 In immediate tr...

Page 1442: ...pre message protocol exchange in the DIS NSF frames Communication Switch 15 Not used do not change the settings Communication Switch 16 SP No 1 104 023 No FUNCTION COMMENTS 0 Not used Do not change t...

Page 1443: ...n F code that matches the received SUB code 0 Disconnect the line 1 Receive the message using normal reception mode Change this setting when the customer requires Communication Switch 18 SP No 1 104 0...

Page 1444: ...e PSTN access code set bit 3 to 1 Communication Switch 1C SP No 1 104 029 No FUNCTION COMMENTS 0 1 Extension access code 8 and 9 to turn V 8 protocol On Off 0 On 1 Off Refer to communication switch 1B...

Page 1445: ...Make sure that you reset these bits after testing 2 Monitor speaker during memory transmission 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 1 The monitor speaker is enabled during memory transmission 3 5 Not used Do not chan...

Page 1446: ...d can only communicate with machines that send T 30 standard frames only 1 Disables NSF NSS signals these are used in non standard mode communication 1 6 Not used Do not change the settings 7 Short pr...

Page 1447: ...mes NResend Number of frames to be retransmitted 1 When using ECM the machine sends a CTC to drop back the modem rate after receiving four PPRs PPR CTC These are ECM protocol signals This bit is not e...

Page 1448: ...006 No FUNCTION COMMENTS Initial Tx modem rate Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 bps 0 0 0 1 2 4k 0 0 1 0 4 8k 0 0 1 1 7 2k 0 1 0 0 9 6k 0 1 0 1 12 0k 0 1 1 0 14 4k 0 1 1 1 16 8k 1 0 0 0 19 2k 1 0 0 1 21 6k 1 0...

Page 1449: ...settings G3 Switch 06 SP No 1 105 007 No FUNCTION COMMENTS Initial Rx modem rate Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 bps 0 0 0 1 2 4k 0 0 1 0 4 8k 0 0 1 1 7 2k 0 1 0 0 9 6k 0 1 0 1 12 0k 0 1 1 0 14 4k 0 1 1 1 16...

Page 1450: ...e modem type for the machine in receive mode If V 34 is not selected V 8 protocol must be disabled manually Cross reference V 8 protocol on off G3 switch 03 bit2 G3 Switch 07 SP No 1 105 008 No FUNCTI...

Page 1451: ...s occurs Communication error with error codes such as 0 20 0 23 etc Modem rate fallback occurs frequently This setting is not effective in V 34 communications 4 PSTN cable equalizer V 8 V 17 rx mode E...

Page 1452: ...rier signal is lost when receiving during non ECM mode 3 Not used Do not change the settings 4 Maximum allowable frame interval during image data reception 0 5 s 1 13 s This bit set the maximum interv...

Page 1453: ...ch the 3 second CNG interval High order bit 3000 2250ms 3000 50xNms 3000 50 x Nms 0F 3000 ms N FF 2250 ms 0 7 Low order bit 00 0E 3000 3700ms 3000 50xNms 3000 50 x Nms 0F 3000 ms N 0F 3700 ms G3 Switc...

Page 1454: ...000 D393 2 Not used Do not change the settings 4 Sidaa manual calibration setting 0 Off 1 On 1 manually calibrates for communication with a line whose current change occurs such as an optical fiber li...

Page 1455: ...l through the communication Make sure that you reset these bits after testing 2 Monitor speaker during memory transmission 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 1 The monitor speaker is enabled during memory transmiss...

Page 1456: ...sing Quick Speed Dials always start from the highest modem rate 1 The machine refers to the modem rate history for communications with the same machine when determining the most suitable rate for the...

Page 1457: ...et in communications at 14 4 12 0 9 6 and 7 2 kbps NTransmit Number of transmitted frames NResend Number of frames to be retransmitted 1 When using ECM the machine sends a CTC to drop back the modem r...

Page 1458: ...ate Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 bps 0 0 0 1 2 4k 0 0 1 0 4 8k 0 0 1 1 7 2k 0 1 0 0 9 6k 0 1 0 1 12 0k 0 1 1 0 14 4k 0 1 1 1 16 8k 1 0 0 0 19 2k 1 0 0 1 21 6k 1 0 1 0 24 0k 1 0 1 1 26 4k 1 1 0 0 28 8k 1 1...

Page 1459: ...06 007 No FUNCTION COMMENTS Initial Rx modem rate Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 bps 0 0 0 1 2 4k 0 0 1 0 4 8k 0 0 1 1 7 2k 0 1 0 0 9 6k 0 1 0 1 12 0k 0 1 1 0 14 4k 0 1 1 1 16 8k 1 0 0 0 19 2k 1 0 0 1 21 6k...

Page 1460: ...If V 34 is not selected V 8 protocol must be disabled manually Cross reference V 8 protocol on off G3 switch 03 bit2 G3 2 Switch 07 SP No 1 106 008 No FUNCTION COMMENTS 0 1 PSTN cable equalizer tx mo...

Page 1461: ...lback occurs frequently This setting is not effective in V 34 communications 4 PSTN cable equalizer V 8 V 17 rx mode External 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Keep this bit at 1 5 Not used Do not change the setti...

Page 1462: ...uring image data reception 0 5 s 1 13 s This bit set the maximum interval between EOL end of line signals and the maximum interval between ECM frames from the other end Try using a longer setting if e...

Page 1463: ...393 122 SM G3 2 Switch 0C Not used do not change the settings G3 2 Switch 0D Not used do not change the settings G3 2 Switch 0E Not used do not change the settings G3 2 Switch 0F Not used do not chang...

Page 1464: ...on via the gatekeeper for IP Fax 5 IP Fax T30 bit signal reverse 0 LSB first 1 MSB first Reverses the T30 bit signal 6 IP Fax max bit rate setting 0 Not affected 1 Affected When 0 is selected the max...

Page 1465: ...edundant packets 4 7 IP Fax preamble wait time setting Selects the preamble wait time 00 to 0f There are 16 values in this 4 bit binary switch combination Waiting time set value level x 100 ms Max 0f...

Page 1466: ...from the SIP server not registered for the machine and send a refusal message 5 ECM communication setting 0 No limit for image compression 1 Limit for image compression 0 This does not limit the type...

Page 1467: ...d the transmission condition is based on the ITU T method 6 Shift down setting at receiving negative code 0 OFF 1 ON Selects whether to shift down when negative codes are received 7 Not used Do not ch...

Page 1468: ...he default is 00 V29 Bit 5 0 Bit 4 0 V29 Bit 5 0 Bit 4 1 V17 Bit 5 1 Bit 4 0 V34 Bit 5 1 Bit 4 1 Not used V34 is not supported for IP Fax communication 6 7 Not used Do not change these settings IP Fax...

Page 1469: ...4 7 V34 is not supported for IP Fax communication IP Fax Switch 07 SP No 1 111 008 No FUNCTION COMMENTS 0 TSI information 0 Not added 1 Added Adds or does not add TSI information to NSS S 1 DCN trans...

Page 1470: ...he default is 00 35 seconds Bit 1 0 Bit 0 0 35 sec Bit 1 0 Bit 0 1 40 sec Bit 1 1 Bit 0 0 50 sec Bit 1 1 Bit 0 1 60 sec 2 3 T4 timer adjustment Adjust the T4 timer The default is 00 3 seconds Bit 3 0...

Page 1471: ...g as SIP server connection 1 Automatic setting 0 The I F setting for fax communication follows the setting for SIP server connection 1 The negotiation between the SIP server and the device decides whe...

Page 1472: ...the Unit column The following addresses describe settings for the standard NCU Change the fourth digit from 5 to 6 e g 680500 to 680600 for the settings for the first optional G3 interface unit and fr...

Page 1473: ...t drop detect time 20 ms Line current detection is disabled Line current is not detected if 680501 contains FF 680504 PSTN dial tone frequency upper limit high byte 680505 PSTN dial tone frequency upp...

Page 1474: ...ck tone off detection time 20 ms 680511 PSTN detection time for silent period after ring back tone detected LOW 20 ms 680512 PSTN detection time for silent period after ring back tone detected HIGH 20...

Page 1475: ...51F PABX dial tone permissible drop time If 68051B contains FF the machine pauses for the pause time 680520 680521 680520 PABX wait interval LOW 680521 PABX wait interval HIGH 20 ms 680522 PABX ringba...

Page 1476: ...me range 3 20 ms 68052F Busy tone OFF time range 3 680530 Busy tone ON time range 4 680531 Busy tone OFF time range 4 680532 Busy tone continuous tone detection time 20 ms 680533 Busy tone signal stat...

Page 1477: ...al dial tone reset time HIGH 68053B International dial tone continuous tone time 68053C International dial tone permissible drop time If 680538 contains FF the machine pauses for the pause time 68053D...

Page 1478: ...l wait interval LOW 680549 Country dial wait interval HIGH 20 ms 68054A Time between opening or closing the DO relay and opening the OHDI relay 1 ms See Notes 3 6 and 8 SP2 103 012 parameter 11 68054B...

Page 1479: ...e difference between high frequency tone and low frequency tone in DTMF signals dBm x 0 5 SP2 103 021 parameter 20 The setting must be less than 5dBm and should not exceed the setting at 680552h above...

Page 1480: ...ms This time is waited for each pause input after the PSTN access code If this address contains FF H the pause time stored in address 68054F is used Do not set a number more than 7 in the UK 68055E Pr...

Page 1481: ...nge 2 lower limit 1000 N Hz SP2 103 006 parameter 05 680576 Number of rings until a call is detected 1 SP2 103 007 parameter 06 The setting must not be zero 680577 Minimum required length of the first...

Page 1482: ...6805A0 Not used Do not change the settings 6805A1 Acceptable CED detection frequency upper limit high byte 6805A2 Acceptable CED detection frequency upper limit low byte BCD Hz If both addresses cont...

Page 1483: ...ion The data is coded in the same way as address 680533 6805AE Not used Do not change the settings 6805AF Acceptable AI short protocol tone 800Hz detection frequency upper limit high byte 6805B0 Accep...

Page 1484: ...one transmission level N 6805B7 0 5N 6805B8 dB 6805B9 PABX 2100 Hz tone transmission level N 6805B7 0 5N 6805B9 dB 6805BD Modem turn on level incoming signal detection level 37 0 5N dBm 6805BE to 6805...

Page 1485: ...used 0 0 0 1 2 75 V 0 0 1 0 5 5 V 1 0 0 0 22 V 6805E3 1 1 1 1 41 25 V Do not change these settings 0 RT 0 Low Bit 1 1 RT 1 High 0 RZ 0 High 6805E4 Bit 1 sets the level of the call signal Bit 3 sets th...

Page 1486: ...M addresses are changed 680508 if bit 0 1 or 680538 if bit 2 1 tolerance for on or off state duration and number of cycles required for detection coded as in address 680533 68050B if bit 0 1 or 68053B...

Page 1487: ...ning 68054D Europe Between Ds closing and Di closing France Between Ds opening and Di closing 7 Tone signals which frequency is lower than 1500Hz e g 800Hz tone for AI short protocol refer to the sett...

Page 1488: ...or Address Book Management 3 Select the address book that you want to program 4 For the fax parameter select Fax Dest for the E mail parameter select E mail then press Start Make sure that the LED of...

Page 1489: ...level may be inappropriate Adjust the Tx level for communications with that terminal until the results are better If the setting is Disabled the NCU parameter 01 setting is used Do not use settings o...

Page 1490: ...0 0 0 0 Not used 0 0 0 1 2400 0 0 1 0 4800 0 0 1 1 7200 0 1 0 0 9600 0 1 0 1 12000 0 1 1 0 14400 0 1 1 1 16800 1 0 0 0 19200 1 0 0 1 21600 1 0 1 0 24000 1 0 1 1 26400 0 3 1 1 0 0 28800 If training wit...

Page 1491: ...method Bit 3 0 Bit 2 0 First DIS or NSF Bit 3 0 Bit 2 1 Second DIS or NSF Bit 3 1 Bit 2 0 Not used Bit 3 1 Bit 2 1 Disabled 0 1 Use this setting if echoes on the line are interfering with the set up...

Page 1492: ...he setting is Disabled the bit switch setting is used Switch 04 Not used do not change the settings Switch 05 Not used do not change the settings Switch 06 Not used do not change the settings Switch 0...

Page 1493: ...ts 0 Registered Bit 0 to 6 1 No registration The 0 selection default references the settings for Bits 00 01 02 above The 1 selection ignores the selections of Bits 00 01 02 Switch 01 No FUNCTION COMME...

Page 1494: ...on of e mail attachment 200 x 200 0 Off 1 On Sets the line resolution of the e mail attachment as 200 x 200 2 Line resolution of e mail attachment 200 x 400 0 Off 1 On Sets the line resolution of the...

Page 1495: ...emand of reception confirmation to a message when transmitting This machine updates the reception capability to the address book when receiving 1 7 Not used Do not change these settings Switch 05 No F...

Page 1496: ...bit switches 680090 to 68009F H G3 2 bit switches Not used 6800A0 to 6800AF H G3 3 bit switches Not used 6800D0 H User parameter switch 00 SWUER_00 Not used 6800D1 H User parameter switch 01 SWUSR_01...

Page 1497: ...On Bit 6 Not used Bit 7 Inclusion of a sample image on reports 0 Off 1 On 6800D5 H User parameter switch 05 SWUSR_05 Bit 0 Substitute reception when the base copier is in an SC condition 0 Enabled 1 D...

Page 1498: ...n results 0 Off 1 On Bit 7 Not used 6800DB H User parameter switch 11 SWUSR_0B Bits 0 and 1 Not used Bit 2 White original detection 0 Off 1 On alarm and alert message on the LCD Bit 3 Receive rejectio...

Page 1499: ...rameter switch 17 SWUSR_11 Bit 0 Not used Bit 1 Disable Broadcasting To avoid accidentally specifying multiple destinations users can disable broadcasting They cannot specify group destinations if the...

Page 1500: ...5 size paper for reports This switch is not printed on the user parameter list 0 Off 1 On Bits 6 and 7 Not used 6800E4 H User parameter switch 20 SWUSR_14 Bit 0 Automatic printing of the LAN fax resul...

Page 1501: ...switching Fax or Fax Tel Bit 2 Mode priority switch 0 Fax first 1 Tel first Bit 3 Dial in function Japan Only Bit 4 RDS operation 0 Not acceptable 1 Acceptable for the limit specified by system switc...

Page 1502: ...207 H The second subscriber number ISDN G4 Not used 680208 to 68021B H PSTN 1 RTI Max 20 characters ASCII See the following note 68021C to 68022F H PSTN 2 RTI Max 20 characters ASCII Not used 680230 t...

Page 1503: ...G3 2 ROM information Read only 680406 H Suffix BCD 680407 H Version BCD 680408 H Year BCD 680409 H Month BCD 68040A H Day BCD 68040B to 68040F Option G3 board G3 3 ROM information Read only 68040B H S...

Page 1504: ...323 1 SIP 68AFD7 H SIP function 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 68AFD8 H H 323 function 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 68AFD9 H SIP digest authentication function 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 68AFDA H IP Fax backup data 00 600 H...

Page 1505: ...tone detection waiting time 20 ms Defaults NA 64 EU 64 ASIA 64 6BEC03 to 6BEC04 Dial tone detection monitoring time 20 ms Defaults Area 6BEC03 6BEC04 NA F4 01 EU F4 01 ASIA F4 01 6BEC05 H Dial tone de...

Page 1506: ...11 7 ins ARDF Face up Single sided document Length 128 1200 mm 5 0 47 2 ins Width 105 297 mm 4 1 11 7 inch Double sided document Length 128 432 mm 5 0 17 inch Width 105 297 mm 4 1 11 7 inch Scanning...

Page 1507: ...34 V 33 V 17 TCM V 29 QAM V 27ter PHM V 8 V 21 FM Data Rate G3 33600 31200 28800 26400 24000 21600 19200 16800 14400 12000 9600 7200 4800 2400 bps Automatic fallback I O Rate With ECM 0 ms line Withou...

Page 1508: ...able items Item Standard Quick Dial 2000 Groups 100 Destination per Group 500 Destinations dialed from the ten key pad overall 500 Programs 100 Auto Document 6 Communication records for Journal stored...

Page 1509: ...n Memory Memory Transmission file 400 400 Maximum number of page for memory transmission 1000 1000 Memory capacity for memory transmission Note1 320 2240 Measured using an ITU T 1 test document Slerex...

Page 1510: ...h a LAN to the server Condition ITU T 1 test document Selerexe Letter MTF correction OFF TTI None Resolution 200 x 100 dpi Communication speed 10 Mbps Correspondent device E mail server Line condition...

Page 1511: ...on Method SMTP AUTH POP before SMTP A POP Remark The machine must be set up as an e mail client before installation Any client PCs connected to the machine through a LAN must also be e mail clients or...

Page 1512: ...ed Original size Maximum A3 or 11 x 17 DLT Maximum scanning size Standard A3 297mm x 432mm Irregular 297mm x 1200mm Transmission protocol Recommended T 38 Annex protocol TCP UDP IP communication Compa...

Page 1513: ...N Component Code No Remarks MBU 9 FCU 4 FCU I F 2 GWFCU I F 1 Speaker D393 5 Included with the fax unit Expansion Memory G578 3 Optional CCU I F Board 8 SG3 Board D393 6 Optional SG3 Board 2nd D393 7...

Page 1514: ...1 Bin Tray BN3070 D414 D414 1 BIN TRAY BN3070 Page Date Added Updated New None...

Page 1515: ......

Page 1516: ...1 Bin Tray BN3070 D414 TABLE OF CONTENTS 1 REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT 1 1 1 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS 1 1 1 1 PAPER SENSOR 1 1 1 2 1 BIN CONTROL BOARD 3...

Page 1517: ......

Page 1518: ...cedure Safety Turn off the main power switch and unplug the machine before beginning any of the replacement procedures in this manual Symbols Used in this Manual This manual uses the following symbols...

Page 1519: ......

Page 1520: ...ents SM 1 D414 Replacement and Adjustment 1 REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT 1 1 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS 1 1 1 PAPER SENSOR 1 Open the right door of the machine 2 Remove the front right cover A x 1 3 1 bin tr...

Page 1521: ...Electrical Components D414 2 SM 4 1 bin sorter unit C 5 Paper sensor cover D x 2 6 Paper sensor E x 1 hook...

Page 1522: ...Electrical Components SM 3 D414 Replacement and Adjustment 1 1 2 1 BIN CONTROL BOARD 1 1 bin tray 2 1 bin sorter unit Paper Sensor 3 1 bin control board A x 1 x 3...

Reviews:

No comments